BMW X1 with iDrive as of 7_12

Document Sample
BMW X1 with iDrive as of 7_12 Powered By Docstoc
					Contents                                                 Owner's Manual for
                                                         Vehicle




A-Z                                                                           The Ultimate Driving
                                                                                   Machine




THE BMW X1.
 OWNER'S MANUAL.




        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
   X1       Owner's Manual for Vehicle
            Thank you for choosing a BMW.
            The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
            will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
            Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
            It contains important information on vehicle operation that will
            help you make full use of the technical features available in your
            BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
            hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
            maintaining the value of your BMW.
            Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
            chures in the onboard literature.
            We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
            BMW AG




Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
© 2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/12, 07 12 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.


                                Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐     Entertainment
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to   160 Tone
page 276.                                            162 Radio
                                                     170 CD/multimedia

6     Notes                                          Communication
                                                     192   Telephone
At a glance
                                                     204   Office
12    Cockpit
                                                     213   Contacts
18    iDrive
                                                     215   ConnectedDrive
25    Voice activation system
                                                     Mobility
Controls
                                                     224   Refueling
30    Opening and closing
                                                     226   Fuel
43    Adjusting
                                                     228   Wheels and tires
50    Transporting children safely
                                                     238   Engine compartment
54    Driving
                                                     243   Maintenance
68    Displays
                                                     245   Replacing components
80    Lamps
                                                     253   Breakdown assistance
85    Safety
                                                     259   Care
94    Driving stability control systems
98    Driving comfort                                Reference
105   Climate                                        266 Technical data
110   Interior equipment                             268 Short commands for voice activation
120   Storage compartments                               system
                                                     276 Everything from A to Z
Driving tips
126 Things to remember when driving
130 Loading
133 Saving fuel

Navigation
138   Navigation system
140   Destination entry
149   Destination guidance
157   What to do if...




                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                         Notes



Notes
Using this Owner's Manual                             scribes and depicts equipment that may not be
                                                      contained in your vehicle because of the se‐
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐      lected special equipment or country version, for
ular topic is by using the index.                     example.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in     This also applies to safety-related functions and
the first chapter.                                    systems.
                                                      For options and equipment not described in this
Additional sources of information
                                                      Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
Should you have any questions, your service           mentary Owner's Manuals.
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
                                                      On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is           arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com                 tions.


Symbols                                               Status of this Owner's Manual
   Indicates precautions that must be followed        at time of printing
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐
                                                      The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
                                                      icy of constant development that is conceived
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐        to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
tion.                                                 the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐    cases, therefore, the features described in this
lect individual functions.                            Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐   vehicle.
tivation system.
                                                      Updates made after the editorial
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
                                                      deadline
voice activation system.
                                                      Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
   Refers to measures that can be taken to help       the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
protect the environment.                              dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

Symbols on vehicle components
    Indicates that you should consult the rele‐       For your own safety
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.              Maintenance and repairs
                                                      Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
                                                      materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
Vehicle equipment                                     quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
This Owner's Manual describes all models, all         ods.
series equipment, as well as country-specific         Therefore, have this work performed only by a
and special equipment offered in the model ser‐       BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ies.Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de‐

      6
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                       Notes


ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐          California Proposition 65 Warning
ately trained personnel.                             California laws require us to state the following
If this work is not carried out properly, there is   warning:
the danger of subsequent damage and related          Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
safety hazards.                                      components and parts, including components
                                                     found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
Parts and accessories                                tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐       ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐             productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
chase accessories tested and approved by             contained in vehicles and certain products of
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐            component wear contain or emit chemicals
ously acquire the assurance that they have been      known to the State of California to cause cancer
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum           and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
performance when installed on your vehicle.          Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐         contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not      hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐   chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
stallation of parts and accessories not approved     animals. Always protect your skin by washing
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made           thoroughly with soap and water.
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the       Service and warranty
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine    We recommend that you read this publication
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐           thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐          lowing warranties:
sional advice on using these items, are available    ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
                                                     ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,         ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
wheels, suspension components, brake dust            ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
shields, telephones, including operation of any      ▷ California Emission Control System Limited
mobile phone from within the vehicle without           Warranty
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-         Detailed information about these warranties is
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may      listed in the Service and Warranty Information
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐          Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's     Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
electrical system or affect the validity of the      Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center            designed to meet the particular operating con‐
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐         ditions and homologation requirements in your
placement, or repair of the emission control de‐     country and continental region in order to deliver
vices and systems may be performed by any au‐        the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
tomotive repair establishment or individual          erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
using any certified automotive part.                 erate your vehicle in another country or region,
                                                     you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
                                                     meet different prevailing operating conditions
                                                     and homologation requirements. You should


                                                                                                7
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                         Notes


also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐     ▷ Ambient conditions, such as the tempera‐
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In     ture.
such case, please contact Customer Relations         These data are of a technical nature only and are
for further information.                             used to detect and eliminate faults and to opti‐
                                                     mize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of routes
Maintenance                                          driven with the vehicle cannot be created from
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road   these data. If services are used, for instance in
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi‐    the event of repairs, service processes, warranty
cle Limited Warranty.                                cases, quality assurance, etc., this technical in‐
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐        formation can be read out from the event and
ures:                                                fault data memories by service personnel, in‐
                                                     cluding the manufacturer, using special diagno‐
▷ BMW Maintenance system
                                                     sis tools. This service personnel can provide you
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet           with more information if needed. After trouble‐
  for US models                                      shooting, the information in the fault memory is
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for             cleared or overwritten continuously.
  Canadian models                                    Situations are conceivable during the use of the
If the vehicle is not maintained according to        vehicle in which these technical data could be‐
these specifications, this could result in serious   come associated with a specific person in com‐
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐       bination with other information, such as an ac‐
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War‐             cident report, damage to the vehicle, witness
ranty.                                               accounts, etc., possibly with the involvement of
                                                     an authorized expert.
                                                     Additional functions that are contractually
Data memory                                          agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
                                                     calization in the event of an emergency, permit
Numerous electronic components in your vehi‐
                                                     the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the ve‐
cle contain data memories that store technical
                                                     hicle.
information on the vehicle condition, events and
faults, either temporarily or permanently. This
technical information generally documents the
state of a component, a module, a system or the      Reporting safety defects
environment.
                                                     For US customers
▷ Operating conditions of system compo‐
  nents, such as filling levels.                     The following only applies to vehicles owned
                                                     and operated in the US.
▷ Status messages from the vehicle and its
  individual components, such as wheel rpm/          If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
  speed, motion delay, transverse accelera‐          which could cause a crash or could cause injury
  tion.                                              or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
                                                     tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
▷ Malfunctions and defects in important sys‐         NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
  tem components, such as lights and brakes.         America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
▷ Vehicle responses to special driving situa‐        Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
  tions, such as airbag deployment, use of the       1-800-831-1117.
  stability control systems.                         If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
                                                     open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety


      8
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     Notes


defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety- related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.




                                                                             9
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                At a glance
                                These overviews of buttons, switches and
                         displays are intended to familiarize you with your
                         vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
                          with the available control concepts and options.




Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         At a glance    Cockpit



Cockpit
Vehicle equipment                                  describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                   your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as     special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment     also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also   tems.



All around the steering wheel




1   Safety switch for rear power win‐                           Automatic headlamp con‐
    dows  41                                                    trol  81
2   Power windows  40                                           Adaptive light control  81
3   Exterior mirror operation  48                               High-beam Assistant  82
4   Lamps                                                       Front fog lamps  83
              Parking lamps  80

                                                   5   Steering column stalk, left
              Low beams  80                                      Turn signal  59


                                                                 High beams, head‐
                                                                 lamp flasher  82




    12
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                    Cockpit      At a glance



             High-beam Assistant  82                              Change the radio station
                                                                  Stopping a traffic announcement
             Roadside parking lamps  82                           Select a music track
                                                                  Scroll through the redial list

             Computer  70                                         Next entertainment source


             Settings and information about                       Recirculated air mode  107
             the vehicle  71

             Instrument lighting  83
                                                     10           Start/stop the engine and switch
                                                                  the ignition on/off  54
6   Steering wheel buttons, left
                                                     11 Steering column stalk, right
             Telephone  192
                                                                  Windshield wipers  59

             Volume
                                                                  Rain sensor  60

             Activate/deactivate the voice acti‐
                                                                  Rear window wiper  61
             vation system  25

7   Shift paddles  64
                                                     12 Ignition lock  54
8   Instrument cluster  14
                                                     13           Steering wheel heating  49
9   Steering wheel buttons, right

                                                     14 Horn, the entire surface
                                                     15 Adjust the steering wheel  49
                                                     16           Cruise control  98


                                                     17 Opening tailgate  35
                                                     18 Releasing the hood  238




                                                                                               13
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         At a glance   Cockpit



Instrument cluster




1   Speedometer                                      ▷ Hill Descent Control  96
2   Indicator/warning lamps  15                      ▷ Computer  70
3   Tachometer  69                                   ▷ Date of next scheduled service, and re‐
4   Current fuel consumption  69                       maining distance to be driven  75

    Engine oil temperature  69                       ▷ Odometer and trip odometer  68

5   Display for                                      ▷ Checking engine oil level  239

    ▷ Clock  68                                      ▷ Settings and information  71

    ▷ External temperature  68                       ▷      Check Control message
                                                         present  77
    ▷ Indicator/warning lamps  15
                                                 7   Fuel gauge  69
    ▷ Cruise control  98
                                                 8   Resetting the trip odometer  68
6   Display for
    ▷ Automatic transmission position  62




    14
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                  Cockpit      At a glance



Indicator/warning lamps                             Symbol Function or system

                                                             Front fog lamps, refer to page 83
The concept


                                                             Lamp flashes:
                                                             DSC or DTC is regulating the propul‐
                                                             sive forces in order to maintain driv‐
                                                             ing stability, refer to page 94

                                                             The handbrake is set, refer to
                                                             page 58

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in              Canada: the parking brake is set, re‐
a variety of combinations and colors.                        fer to page 58.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper
                                                             Engine malfunction with adverse ef‐
functioning when the engine is started or the ig‐
                                                             fect on emissions, refer to
nition is switched on, and light up briefly.
                                                             page 244

                                                             Canada: engine malfunction with ad‐
Text messages
                                                             verse effect on exhaust emissions,
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control               refer to page 244
Display explain the meaning of the displayed in‐
dicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages
You can call up more information, e.g., on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, refer to page 77.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Symbol Function or system

          Turn signals, refer to page 59


          High beams/headlamp flasher, refer
          to page 82




                                                                                              15
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         At a glance      Cockpit



All around the center console




1   Headliner  17                                   8            PDC Park Distance Control  100
2   Control Display  18                                          Backup camera  102
3   Air vent  108                                                HDC Hill Descent Control  96
4             Hazard warning system  253

                                                                 Deactivate the Automatic Engine
              Central locking system  34                         Start/Stop Function  56

                                                                 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
                                                                 trol  94
5   Automatic climate control  105
                                                                 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
6   Glove compartment  120
                                                                 trol  95
7   Radio and CD/DVD drive  162
                                                                 ECO PRO  134
    Programmable memory buttons  23

                                                    9   Selector lever with automatic transmis‐
                                                        sion  62
                                                    10 Controller with buttons  18




    16
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                             Cockpit    At a glance



All around the headliner




1       Emergency Request  253                4            Reading lamps  84


2       Panoramic glass sunroof  41           5            Interior lamps  84


3       Indicator lamp for the front pas‐
        senger airbags  87




                                                                                      17
                 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          At a glance   iDrive



iDrive
Vehicle equipment                                         The buttons can be used to open the menus
                                                          directly. The controller can be used to select
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                          menu items and create the settings.
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in         Control Display
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This       Notes
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐    ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
tems.                                                  instructions, refer to page 262.
                                                     ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
                                                       Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
The concept                                            be damaged.
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐      Switching off
ated from a central location.
                                                     1.        Press the button.
      Using the iDrive during a trip
                                                     2. "Switch off control display"
      To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀



Controls at a glance
Controls
                                                     Switching on
                                                     Press the controller again to switch the screen
                                                     back on.




1   Control Display
2   Controller with buttons




     18
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                    iDrive    At a glance


Controller                                         Press the button Function
Select menu items and create settings.
                                                   NAV                Opens the Navigation
1. Turn.                                                              menu.

                                                   TEL                Opens the Telephone
                                                                      menu.

                                                   BACK               Displays the previous
                                                                      panel.

                                                   OPTION             Opens the Options menu.




2. Press.
                                                  Operating concept
                                                  Opening the main menu
                                                         Press the button.




3. Move in four directions.




                                                  The main menu is displayed.
                                                  All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
                                                  menu.




Buttons on controller

Press the button Function

MENU              Opens the main menu.

RADIO             Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA             Opens the CD/Multimedia
                  menu.




                                                                                            19
                     Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         At a glance    iDrive


Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
   item is highlighted.




                                                    White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate
                                                    that additional panels can be opened.


                                                    View of an opened menu
                                                    When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
2. Press the controller.                            the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
                                                    display the first panel of a menu:
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
                                                    ▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be         until the first panel is displayed.
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".                                         ▷ Press the menu button on the controller
                                                      twice.
Changing between panels
                                                    Opening the Options menu
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.               Press the button.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
                                                    The "Options" menu is displayed.
   The current panel is closed and the previous
   panel is displayed.
   The previous panel is opened again by
   pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
   current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
   A new panel is opened on top of the previous
   display.


                                                    Additional options: move the controller to the
                                                    right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐
                                                    played.

                                                    Options menu
                                                    The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
                                                    ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control
                                                      display".



    20
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     iDrive    At a glance


▷ Control options for the selected main menu,      Example: setting the clock
  e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for     Setting the clock
  the selected menu, for instance "Store
  station".                                        1.         Press the button. The main menu is
                                                        displayed.
Changing settings                                  2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
1. Select a field.                                    lighted, and then press the controller.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
   is displayed.




                                                   3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
                                                      to display "Time/Date".
3. Press the controller.                           4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐
                                                      lighted, and then press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
    The function is activated.
   The function is deactivated.


                                                   5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
                                                      lighted, and then press the controller.




                                                                                             21
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          At a glance      iDrive


6. Turn the controller to set the hours and            Symbol Meaning
   press the controller.
                                                                Roaming is active.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
   press the controller.                                        Text message, e-mail was received.

                                                                Check the SIM card.
Status information                                              SIM card is blocked.

Status field                                                    SIM card is missing.
The following information is displayed in the sta‐              Enter the PIN.
tus field at the top right:
▷ Time.                                               Entertainment symbols
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.                                Symbol    Meaning
▷ Wireless network reception strength.                           CD/DVD player.
▷ Telephone status.
                                                                 Music collection.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
                                                                 Gracenote® database.
Status field symbols                                             AUX-IN port.
The symbols are grouped into various catego‐
ries.                                                            USB audio interface.

                                                                 Music interface for smartphones.
Radio symbols

Symbol       Meaning
                                                      Additional symbols

             HD Radio™ is switched on.                 Symbol Meaning
             Satellite radio is switched on.                    Spoken instructions are switched off.

                                                                Request of the current vehicle posi‐
Telephone symbols                                               tion.

Symbol Meaning

            Incoming or outgoing call.                Split screen
            Missed call.
                                                      General information
            Wireless network reception strength       Additional information can be displayed on the
            Symbol flashes: searching for net‐        right side of the split screen, e.g., information
            work.                                     from the computer.
            Wireless network is not available.        In the divided screen view, the so-called split
                                                      screen, this information remains visible even
            Bluetooth is switched on.                 when you change to another menu.



     22
                             Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     iDrive     At a glance


Switching the split screen on and off               Running a function
                                                            Press the button.
1.        Press the button.
                                                            The function will run immediately. This
2. "Split screen"
                                                    means, for example, that the number is dialed
                                                    when a phone number is selected.
Selecting the display

1.        Press the button.                         Displaying the button assignment
2. "Split screen"                                   Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
                                                    gloves or use objects.
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
   selected.                                        The key assignment is displayed at the top edge
                                                    of the screen.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
   content".
5. Select the desired menu item.




                                                    ▷ To display short information: touch the but‐
                                                      ton.
                                                    ▷ To display detailed information: touch the
                                                      button for an extended period.
Programmable memory
buttons
                                                    Entering letters and numbers
General information                                 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐         bers.
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
                                                    2. Select additional letters or numbers if
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
                                                       needed.
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.                                               3. "OK": confirm the entry.

The settings are stored for the remote control
                                                     Symbol Function
currently in use.
                                                              Press the controller: delete the letter
Saving a function                                             or number.
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.                     Press the controller for an extended
                                                              period: delete all letters or numbers.
2.           Press the desired button for more
     than two seconds.                                        Enter a blank space.




                                                                                              23
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         At a glance    iDrive


Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering letters and numbers.
Symbol         Function

               Enter the letters.

               Enter the numbers.


Switching between upper and lower
case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering uppercase and lowercase let‐
ters.
Symbol       Function

             Move the controller forward:
             switch from upper to lower case
             letters.

             Move the controller forward:
             switch from lower to upper case
             letters.


Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐
  try for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
  entered using the spelling of language avail‐
  able on the Control Display.




    24
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                    Voice activation system        At a glance



Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment                                     Using voice activation
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                      Activating the voice activation system
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                      1.            Press the button on the steering
describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                           wheel.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This        2. Wait for the signal.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐     3. Say the command.
tems.                                                      The command appears on the Control Dis‐
                                                           play.
                                                         The symbol on the Control Display indicates
The concept                                           that the voice activation system is active.
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the            If no other commands are available, operate the
  Control Display can be operated with the            function via iDrive in this case.
  voice activation system using spoken com‐
  mands. The system prompts you to make               Terminating the voice activation
  your entries.                                       system
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
  vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐                Briefly press the button on the steering
  ing the voice activation system.                    wheel or ›Cancel‹.
▷ The system uses a special microphone lo‐
  cated in the area of the interior rearview mir‐
  ror.                                                Possible commands
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's            Most menu items on the Control Display can be
  Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐        voiced as commands.
  tem.                                                The available commands depend on the menu
                                                      that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
                                                      play.
Requirements                                          The functions of the main menu have short com‐
Via the Control Display, set a language that is       mands.
also supported by the voice activation system         Some list items, such as the phone book entries,
so that the spoken commands can be identified.        can also be selected via the voice activation sys‐
Set the language, refer to page 74.                   tem. Say the list items exactly as they are dis‐
                                                      played on the list.

                                                      Having possible commands read aloud
                                                      You can have the system read possible com‐
                                                      mands aloud: ›Voice commands‹.




                                                                                                 25
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          At a glance    Voice activation system


For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed,     On the Control Display:
the commands for the settings are read out loud.
                                                      1. "Settings"
Executing functions using short                       2. "Language/Units"
commands                                              3. "Speech mode:"
Functions on the main menu can be performed           4. Select the setting.
directly by means of short commands, usually
irrespective of which menu item is currently se‐
lected, for instance ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 268.

Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
  current operating options and the most im‐          Adjusting the volume
  portant commands for them are announced.            Turn the volume knob while giving an instruction
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information           until the desired volume is set.
  about the principle of operation for the voice      ▷ The volume remains constant even if the
  activation system is announced.                       volume of other audio sources is changed.
                                                      ▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
                                                        currently in use.
Example: playing back a CD
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
   if necessary.                                      Notes on Emergency
                                                      Requests
2.            Press the button on the steering
                                                      Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
     wheel.
                                                      an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
3. ›C D and multimedia‹                               the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
     The medium last played is played back.           unnecessarily delay the establishment of a te‐
                                                      lephone connection.
4. ›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
                                                      Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
                                                      page 253, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the         Environmental conditions
standard dialog or a shorter version.
                                                      ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an‐
                                                        smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
nouncements from the system are issued in an
                                                        sis, and speed.
abbreviated form.



     26
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                               Voice activation system     At a glance


▷ Always say commands in the language of
  the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
  closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
  while speaking.




                                                                                         27
                     Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                       Controls
                              This chapter is intended to provide you with
                         information that will give you complete control of
                         your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
                            useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
                                           convenience are described here.




Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls       Opening and closing



Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment                                        The settings called up and implemented when
                                                         the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
This chapter describes all series equipment as           control is used to unlock the vehicle, refer to
well as country-specific and special equipment           Personal Profile.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                         In addition, information about service require‐
describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                         ments is stored in the remote control, Service
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
                                                         data in the remote control, refer to page 243.
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
                                                         Integrated key
tems.



Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control




                                                         Press button 1 and pull out the key.

                                                         The integrated key fits the following locks:
                                                         ▷ Driver's door, refer to page 34.

                                                         New remote controls
1   Unlocking
                                                         You can obtain new remote controls from your
2   Locking                                              service center.
3   Opening tailgate
                                                         Loss of the remote controls
General information                                      Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls         service center.
with keys.
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
                                                         Personal Profile
is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven.
                                                         The concept
Use each remote control at least twice a year for
longer road trips in order to maintain the batter‐       You can set several of your vehicle's functions
ies' charge status.                                      to suit your personal needs and preferences.
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the            ▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,             profile currently activated in the remote con‐
refer to page 38.                                          trol.



     30
                             Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                    Opening and closing        Controls


▷ The remote control used is detected when             ▷ Type of display, refer to page 104.
  the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile   ▷ Light settings:
  is called up.
                                                       ▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized              page 59.
  and called up again even if the vehicle has
                                                       ▷ Welcome lamps, refer to page 80.
  been used in the meantime by someone else
  with another remote control.                         ▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer
                                                         to page 81.
The individual settings are stored for a maximum
of four remote controls. They are stored for two       ▷ Daytime running lights, refer to
remote controls if Comfort Access is in use.             page 81.
                                                       ▷ High-beam Assistant, refer to
Personal Profile settings                                page 82.
The following functions and settings can be        ▷ Automatic climate control: AUTO program,
stored in a profile.                                 cooling function and automatic recirculated
More information on the settings can be found        air control activated/deactivated, tempera‐
under:                                               ture, air flow rate and distribution, refer to
                                                     page 105.
▷ Assigning the programmable memory but‐
  tons, refer to page 23.                          ▷ Navigation:
▷ Response of the central locking system               ▷ Voice activation, refer to page 151.
  when the car is being unlocked, refer to             ▷ Route criteria, refer to page 149.
  page 32.                                             ▷ Map view settings, refer to page 152.
▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to       ▷ Entertainment:
  page 35.
                                                       ▷ Tone control, refer to page 160.
▷ Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi‐
  tion after unlocking, refer to page 33.              ▷ Radio, stored stations, refer to
                                                         page 168.
▷ Settings for the display on the Control Dis‐
  play and in the instrument cluster:                  ▷ CD/multimedia, audio source listened to
                                                         last, refer to page 170.
   ▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to
     page 73.                                      ▷ Telephone: volume, refer to page 196.

   ▷ Date format, refer to page 74.
   ▷ Brightness of the Control Display, refer      Central locking system
     to page 75.
   ▷ Language on the Control Display, refer        The concept
     to page 74.                                   The central locking system becomes active
   ▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,        when the driver's door is closed.
     distance covered/remaining distances,         The system simultaneously engages and re‐
     and temperature, refer to page 72.            leases the locks on the following:
▷ Show visual warning for the Park Distance        ▷ Doors.
  Control PDC, refer to page 101.
                                                   ▷ Tailgate.
▷ Backup camera:
                                                   ▷ Fuel filler flap.
   ▷ Function selection, refer to page 102.



                                                                                            31
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Opening and closing


Operating from the outside                           You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
▷ Via the remote control.                            The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
▷ Via the door lock.                                 rently in use.

▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door          1. "Settings"
  handles on the driver's and front passenger        2. "Door locks"
  sides.
                                                     3. "Unlock button:"
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
  courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re‐
  fer to page 39.

Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system, re‐   4. Select the desired function:
fer to page 35.
                                                        ▷ "All doors"
If the vehicle is locked from the inside, the fuel
filler flap remains unlocked.                                   The entire vehicle is unlocked.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the        ▷ "Driver's door only"
central locking system unlocks automatically.                    Only the driver's door and the fuel
The hazard warning system and interior lamps                filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again
come on.                                                    unlocks the entire vehicle.

                                                     Convenient opening
Opening and closing: from the                           Press and hold the button on the remote
outside                                              control.
                                                     The windows and the panoramic glass sunroof
Using the remote control                             open.

General information                                  Locking
      Take the remote control with you                       Press the button on the remote control.
      People or animals left unattended in a              Locking from the outside
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐             Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
side. Always take the remote control with you        there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can     unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
then be opened from the outside.◀                    edge.◀

Unlocking                                            Switching on the interior lamps and
    Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.       courtesy lamps
The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and cour‐                  Press the button on the remote control
tesy lamps are switched on.                          with the vehicle locked.


     32
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                       Opening and closing          Controls


Panic mode                                            When the vehicle is being unlocked, these po‐
You can trigger the alarm system if you find          sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting
yourself in a dangerous situation.                    is activated.

    Press the button on the remote control for at           Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
least 3 seconds.                                            If this function is used, first make sure that
To switch off the alarm: press any button.            the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
                                                      Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
Unlocking tailgate                                    damage to objects behind the seat as a result of
                                                      a rearward movement of the seat.◀
   Press the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second and release.                         The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of        ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.         ▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.          ory is pressed.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.                                         Selecting automatic activation
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do      1. "Settings"
not place the remote control into the cargo area.     2. "Door locks"
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is         3. "Last seat position auto."
pushed closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the tailgate
has not been inadvertently unlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"


                                                      Malfunctions
                                                      Local radio waves may interfere with the remote
                                                      control.
                                                      In this case, unlock and lock the car at the door
                                                      lock with the integrated key.
                                                      In vehicles without an alarm system or Comfort
                                                      Access, only the driver's door can be unlocked
                                                      and locked using the integrated key in the door
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings               lock.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions       If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐      control, the battery in the remote control is dis‐
rently in use.                                        charged. Use the remote control during an ex‐
                                                      tended drive in order to recharge the battery,
                                                      refer to page 30. The remote control for Comfort


                                                                                                 33
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Opening and closing


Access contains a battery that may need to be       In some market-specific versions, the alarm sys‐
replaced, refer to page 38.                         tem, refer to page 38, is triggered if the vehicle
                                                    is unlocked via the door lock.
For US owners only                                  To stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
The transmitter and receiver units comply with      remote control or insert the remote control into
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication            the ignition lock all the way.
Commission regulations. Operation is governed       In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
by the following:                                   driver's door can be locked via the door lock.
FCC ID:
LX8766S                                             Locking the doors, the fuel filler flap,
                                                    and the tailgate all at once
LX8766E
                                                    To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail‐
LX8CAS
                                                    gate at once:
Compliance statement:
                                                    1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
                                                       the button for the central locking system in
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
                                                       the interior, refer to page 34.
conditions:
                                                    2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
                                                       senger door, refer to page 35.
  ence, and
                                                    3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
  ceived, including interference that may               ▷ Lock the driver's door using the
  cause undesired operation.                              integrated key in the door lock, or

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to            ▷ Press down the lock button of the front
these devices could void the user's authority to          passenger door and close the door from
operate this equipment.                                   the outside.

Using the door lock                                 Manual operation
                                                    If an electrical malfunction occurs, unlock or lock
General information                                 the driver's door using the integrated key in the
                                                    door lock.



                                                    Opening and closing: from the
                                                    inside



     Locking from the outside
      Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀


    34
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                     Opening and closing         Controls


Locking and unlocking                               Locking
        Press the button in the vehicle.            ▷            Press the button. The doors are
                                                                 locked.
The doors and the tailgate are locked or un‐        ▷ Press the lock button of a door. To prevent
locked when the front doors are closed, but they      you from being locked out, the opened driv‐
are not secured against theft.                        er's door cannot be locked using the lock
                                                      button.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
                                                          Take the remote control with you
Automatic locking                                         People or animals left unattended in a
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐   parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
rently in use.                                      side. Always take the remote control with you
                                                    when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
1. "Settings"
                                                    then be opened from the outside.◀
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
    ▷ "Lock if no door is opened"                   Tailgate
        The vehicle locks automatically after a
        short period of time if a door is not       Opening
        opened.                                     The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
    ▷ "Lock after start. to drive"                  Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
        The vehicle locks automatically after       fore opening.
        you drive away.                                   Provide edge protection
                                                          Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
                                                    window while driving and damage the heating
                                                    wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
                                                    tion.◀

                                                    Opening from the inside




Unlocking and opening
▷           Press the button. The doors are un‐
            locked. To open, pull the door han‐
    dle above the armrest.
▷ Pull the door handle above the armrest
  twice: the door is unlocked the first time and
  opened the second time.                                    Press the button.
                                                             The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is
                                                    stationary, provided that the tailgate has not
                                                    been locked.



                                                                                              35
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Opening and closing


Opening from the outside                             Closing




▷ Press the button next to the tailgate.             Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
▷      Press the remote control button for ap‐       can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
    prox. 1 second and then release.                 gate.

The tailgate opens slightly. It can be swung up‐     Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the
ward.                                                cargo floor panel is not raised, refer to
                                                     page 118.
Opening manually                                           Keep the closing area clear
In case of an electrical malfunction:                      Make sure that the closing area of the tail‐
                                                     gate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, enlarge
                                                     result.◀
   the cargo area, refer to page 115.
2. From the cargo area, press out the handle in
   the tailgate, see arrow, and pull out as far as
   possible. The tailgate is unlocked.               Comfort Access
                                                     The concept
                                                     The vehicle can be accessed without activating
                                                     the remote control.
                                                     All you need to do is to have the remote control
                                                     with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
                                                     The vehicle automatically detects the remote
                                                     control when it is nearby or in the passenger
                                                     compartment.
3. Open the tailgate from the outside and press      Comfort Access supports the following func‐
   in the handle.                                    tions:
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is        ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
closed.                                              ▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
                                                     ▷ Starting the engine.
                                                     ▷ Convenient closing.




     36
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                    Opening and closing         Controls


Functional requirement                             To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must     and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
  be located outside of the vehicle.               sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
                                                   hicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
  possible until after approx. 2 seconds.          If a remote control is detected within the vehicle,
                                                   the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked again.
▷ The engine can only be started if the remote
  control is inside the vehicle.
                                                   Convenient closing
Comparison with ordinary remote                    Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and
control                                            hold.

The functions can be controlled by pressing the    In addition, the windows and the panoramic
buttons or via Comfort Access.                     glass sunroof close.
                                                         Monitor the closing process
Unlocking                                                Watch during the closing process to be
                                                   sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand
                                                   from the door handle immediately stops the
                                                   closing process.◀

                                                   Unlocking the tailgate separately
                                                   Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.
                                                   This corresponds to pressing the         button.
                                                   If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas‐     area is detected in the locked vehicle, the tail‐
senger door completely, arrow 1.                   gate opens again.

This corresponds to pressing the       button.
                                                   Ignition on
                                                   Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
Locking                                            nition on.
                                                   When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal,
                                                   otherwise the engine will start.

                                                   Starting the engine
                                                   The engine can be started or the ignition can be
                                                   switched on when a remote control is inside the
                                                   vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
                                                   control into the ignition lock, refer to page 54.

Touch the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with   Switching off the engine in cars with
your finger for approx. 1 second.                  automatic transmission
This corresponds to pressing the           but‐    The engine can only be switched off with trans‐
ton.                                               mission position P engaged, refer to page 56.




                                                                                              37
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Controls     Opening and closing


To switch the engine off with transmission po‐        Replacing the battery
sition N engaged, insert the remote control in        The remote control for Comfort Access con‐
the ignition lock.                                    tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
                                                      time to time.
Malfunction
                                                      1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
The Comfort Access functions can be disturbed
                                                         control, refer to page 30.
by local radio waves, such as by a mobile phone
in the immediate vicinity of the remote control or    2. Remove the cover.
when a mobile phone is being charged in the
vehicle.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
To start the engine afterward, insert the remote
control into the ignition switch.

Warning lamps
           The warning lamp in the instrument         3. Insert a new battery of the same type with
           cluster lights up when you attempt to         the positive side facing upwards.
           start the engine: the engine cannot be     4. Press the cover closed.
started.                                                    Return used battery to a recycling collec‐
The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a           tion point or to your service center.
malfunction. Take the remote control with you
inside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces‐
sary, insert another remote control into the ig‐
nition switch.                                        Alarm system
          The warning lamp in the instrument          The concept
          cluster lights up while the engine is       The vehicle alarm system responds to:
          running: the remote control is no lon‐      ▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
ger inside the vehicle.
                                                      ▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
After switching off the engine, the engine can          sensor, refer to page 39.
only be started again within approx. 10 seconds
                                                      ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
if no door has been opened.
                                                        tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
         The indicator lamp in the instrument         ▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
         cluster comes on and a message ap‐           The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
         pears on the Control Display: replace
                                                      ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
the remote control battery.
                                                      ▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
                                                      ▷ By flashing the high beams.




     38
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                        Opening and closing         Controls


Arming and disarming the alarm                         ▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
system                                                   2 seconds:
                                                           The system is armed.
General information
                                                       ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
                                                           The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
                                                           properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
                                                           cured.
Door lock and armed alarm system                           The indicator lamp flashes continuously af‐
                                                           ter approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
                                                           sensor is not active.
on some market-specific versions.
                                                       ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or switch on the ignition.                  The vehicle has not been tampered with.
                                                       ▷ If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
Tailgate and armed alarm system                          until the remote control is inserted in the ig‐
The tailgate can be opened using the remote              nition, but for no longer than approx. 5 mi‐
control, even if the alarm system is armed.              nutes:
    Press the button on the remote control.                An alarm has been triggered.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
                                                       Panic mode
tored again by the alarm system. The hazard
warning system flashes once.                           In dangerous situations, trigger the alarm sys‐
                                                       tem:
In some market-specific versions, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if             Press the button on the remote control for at
the vehicle was unlocked first.                        least 3 seconds.
                                                       To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,         Tilt alarm sensor
  refer to page 32.                                    The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
▷ Insert the remote control all the way into the       The alarm system responds in situations such
  ignition lock.                                       as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview                Interior motion sensor
mirror                                                 For the sensor to function properly, the windows
                                                       and panoramic glass sunroof must be closed.

                                                       Avoiding unintentional alarms
                                                       The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
                                                       can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
                                                       lowing situations:
                                                       ▷ In duplex garages.
                                                       ▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
                                                         sea or on a trailer.



                                                                                                 39
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls     Opening and closing


▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.         Closing
                                                           Danger of pinching
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor                                     Monitor the closing process and make
                                                     sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
        Press the remote control button again
                                                     otherwise, injuries may result.◀
within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
                                                     ▷        Pull the switch to the resistance point.
onds and then flashes continuously.
                                                         The window closes while the switch is held.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
remain switched off until the vehicle is locked
                                                     ▷         Pull the switch beyond the resistance
again.
                                                         point.
                                                         The window closes automatically.
Power windows                                        Pressing the switch stops the motion.
                                                     Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the
General information                                  remote control or the door lock.
      Take the remote control with you               Convenient closing, refer to page 37, with Com‐
      Take the remote control with you when          fort Access.
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the power windows and injure          After the ignition is switched off
themselves.◀                                         When the remote control is removed or the ig‐
                                                     nition is switched off, the windows can continue
                                                     to be operated for approx. 1 minute as long as
                                                     no door is opened.

                                                     Pinch protection system
                                                     If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
                                                     window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
                                                     The window reopens slightly.
                                                           Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
                                                           tection
Opening
                                                     Even with the pinch protection system, check
                                                     that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
▷         Press the switch to the resistance
                                                     wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
    point.
                                                     situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
    The window opens while the switch is held.
                                                           Do not use window accessories
▷        Press the switch beyond the resist‐              Do not install any accessories in the range
    ance point.                                      of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
    The window opens automatically.                  pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Pressing again stops the motion.




     40
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                      Opening and closing         Controls


Closing without the pinch protection                       Take the remote control with you
system                                                     Take the remote control with you when
For example, if there is an external danger or if    leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
ice on the windows prevents a window from            cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.◀
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
   hold it there.
    Pinch protection is limited and the window
    reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
    a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
   again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
   there.
    The window closes without pinch protec‐
                                                     Tilting the glass sunroof
    tion.
                                                                    Press the switch briefly.
Safety switch                                                       ▷ The closed roof is tilted and
With the safety switch, the rear windows are                          the sliding visor opens
prevented from being opened or closed via the                         slightly.
switches in the rear passenger area, such as by                     ▷ The opened roof closes until
children.                                                             it is in its tilted position. The
                                                                      sliding visor stays completely
        Press the button.                                             open.
The LED lights up if the safety function is                             Pressing the switch again
switched on.                                                            closes the sliding visor al‐
      Safety switch for rear operation                                  most completely.

       Press the safety switch when transporting           Do not use force to close the sliding visor
children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
                                                           Do not use force to close the sliding visor
if the windows are closed without supervision.◀
                                                     with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth‐
                                                     erwise the mechanism will be damaged.◀

Panoramic glass sunroof                              Opening/closing the sliding visor
General information                                                 ▷ Press the switch in the de‐
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be                        sired direction to the resist‐
operated together or separately using the                             ance point and hold it there.
switch.                                                                 The sliding visor moves while
                                                                        the switch is being held.
      Danger of pinching
                                                     ▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
       Monitor the closing process and make
                                                       past the resistance point.
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀                  The sliding visor moves automatically.
                                                         Pressing the switch again stops the motion.


                                                                                                41
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Opening and closing


Opening/closing the glass sunroof                      extreme situations, such as when thin objects
With the sliding visor open, proceed as descri‐        are present.◀
bed under Sliding visor.
                                                       Closing without the pinch protection
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and                  system
sliding visor together                                 For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
               Press the switch twice in the de‐       ceed as follows:
               sired direction past the resist‐        1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
               ance point.                                ance point and hold.
              The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐            Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
              sor move together. Pressing the              opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a
switch again stops the motion.                             certain value.
Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the        2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
remote control or the door lock.                          resistance point and hold until the roof
Convenient closing, refer to page 37, with Com‐           closes without pinch protection.
fort Access.
                                                       Initialization after a power failure
Comfort position                                       After a power failure, it is only possible to raise
In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open.   the roof, if necessary.
This reduces wind noise in the passenger com‐          Have the system initialized by your service cen‐
partment.                                              ter.
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed
all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If
desired, continue the motion following this with
the switch.

After the ignition is switched off
The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi‐
nute, as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
      Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
      tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain


     42
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                 Adjusting      Controls



Adjusting
Vehicle equipment                                   Adjusting manually

This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.



Sitting safely                                      Forward/backward
                                                    Pull lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐    position.
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
                                                    After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
The seating position plays an important role in     or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐
an accident in combination with:                    erly.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 45.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 46.                Height
▷ Airbags, refer to page 85.                        Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
                                                    lift it off, as necessary.


Seats                                               Backrest tilt

Note before adjusting
     Do not adjust the seat while driving
      Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving.
The seat could respond with unexpected move‐
ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.◀

     Do not incline the backrest too far to the     Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the backrest
     rear                                           or lift it off, as necessary.
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐
ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate
the protection normally provided by the belt.◀




                                                                                              43
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Controls    Adjusting


Seat tilt




                                                   4   Backrest

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat   The head restraint can be adjusted manually,
or lift it off, as necessary.                      refer Head restraints below.

Thigh support                                      Lumbar support




Pull the lever and move the thigh support for‐     You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
ward or back.                                      to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.
                                                   The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐
Adjusting electrically                             plementary support to help you maintain a re‐
                                                   laxed, upright sitting position.
                                                   ▷ Increase or decrease curvature:
                                                       Press front or rear section of switch.
                                                   ▷ Shift curvature up or down:
                                                       Press upper or lower section of switch.

                                                   Backrest width

1   Forward/backward
2   Height
3   Seat tilt




     44
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                   Adjusting       Controls


The width of the backrest can be changed with         Safety belts
the side wings to adjust the side support to your
own needs.                                            General information
Press front or rear section of switch.                Always make sure that safety belts are being
The backrest width decreases or increases.            worn by all occupants before driving away.
                                                      Although airbags enhance safety by providing
Adjusting the rear seat backrests                     added protection, they are not a substitute for
Adjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 115.          safety belts.

                                                      Seats with safety belt
Seat heating                                          ▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
                                                        correct for adult seat occupants of every
                                                        build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
                                                      ▷ The two rear safety belt buckles integrated
                                                        into the rear seat are for passengers sitting
                                                        on the left and right.
                                                      ▷ The belt buckle embossed with the word
                                                        CENTER is intended exclusively for use by
                                                        passengers riding in the center position.
                                                      ▷ If the middle safety belt is used in the rear,
                                                        the left backrest must be locked, refer to
Switching on                                            page 115; otherwise, the safety belt will not
         Press the button once for each temper‐         have a restraining effect.
         ature level.
                                                      Notes
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.                                         One person per safety belt

If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes,         Never allow more than one person to wear
the seat heating is activated automatically with      a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
the temperature set last.                             children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

                                                            Putting on the belt
Switching off
                                                            Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
Press the button longer.                              across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
The LEDs go out.                                      body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to       around the hips in the lap area and does not
no heat in order to reduce the load on the bat‐       press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
tery. The LEDs remain lit.                            slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐
                                                      pact and injure the abdomen.
                                                      The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
                                                      on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
                                                      ble objects, or be pinched.◀




                                                                                                 45
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls        Adjusting


      Reduction of restraining effect                Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
       Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the      tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder    checked.
belt periodically to readjust the tension across           Checking and replacing safety belts
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
                                                           Have the work performed only by your
safety belt may be reduced.◀
                                                     service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
                                                     that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Buckling the belt

                                                     Head restraints
                                                     Correctly adjusted head restraints
                                                     A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
                                                     risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
                                                           Adjusting the head restraint
                                                            Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the     occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
belt buckle.                                         risk of injury in an accident.◀


Unbuckling the belt                                  Height
                                                     Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
1. Hold the belt firmly.
                                                     prox. at ear level.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.                Distance
                                                     Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
Safety belt reminder for the driver's and            as close as possible to the back of the head.
front passenger seat
         The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐     Front
         nal sounds. In addition, a message ap‐
         pears on the Control Display. Check         Height adjustment
         whether the safety belt has been fas‐
tened correctly.

The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.

Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:                                              ▷ To raise: pull.
                                                     ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
                                                       push the head restraint down.


    46
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                   Adjusting     Controls


Rear                                                 Storing

Height adjustment




                                                     1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
                                                        tion, refer to page 54.
▷ To raise: pull.                                    2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and              desired positions.
  push the head restraint down.
                                                     3.            Press the button. The LED in the
The height of the middle head restraint cannot            button lights up.
be adjusted.
                                                     4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2. The
                                                        LED goes out.
Removing at the front and rear
                                                     If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
                                                              Press the button again. The LED goes
1. Pull upward as far as possible.                   out.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and completely
   pull out the head restraint with the rear seat    Calling up settings
   backrest folded forward slightly.                        Do not retrieve the memory setting while
      Before transporting passengers                        driving
      Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐     Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving,
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐      as an unexpected seat movement could result
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐   in an accident.◀
able.◀
                                                     Comfort function
                                                     1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
Seat and mirror memory                                  switch on the radio ready state, refer to
                                                        page 54.
General information                                  2. Briefly press the desired memory but‐
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror         ton 1 or 2.
positions can be stored and retrieved.               The seat is automatically moved to the stored
The adjustment of the backrest width and the         position.
lumbar support is not stored in the memory.          The procedure stops when a switch for setting
                                                     the seat or one of the memory buttons is
                                                     pressed.



                                                                                                47
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Controls     Adjusting


Safety mode                                            Adjusting electrically
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni‐                The setting corresponds to the direction
   tion on or off, refer to page 54.                           in which the button is pressed.
2. Press and hold the desired memory button
   1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com‐
                                                       Saving positions
   pleted.
                                                       Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 47.


Mirrors                                                Adjusting manually
                                                       If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
Exterior mirrors                                       press the edges of the mirror glass.

General information                                    Automatic Curb Monitor
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved        When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
than the driver's mirror.                              glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
                                                       senger side. This improves your view of the curb
      Estimating distances correctly
                                                       and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
      Objects reflected in the mirror are closer       example.
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you see        Activating
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
accident.◀                                             1.            Slide the mirror changeover switch
                                                            to the driver's side mirror position.
At a glance                                            2. Shift into reverse or engage transmission
                                                          position R.

                                                       Deactivating
                                                       Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
                                                       senger's side mirror position.

                                                       Fold in and out
                                                       Press button 2.
                                                       Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
1   Adjusting
                                                       For example, this is advantageous
2   Fold in and out
                                                       ▷ In car washes.
3   Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
                                                       ▷ In narrow streets.
                                                       ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
Selecting a mirror                                       away manually.
                                                       Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
          To change over to the other mirror:
                                                       matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Slide the mirror changeover switch.




     48
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                  Adjusting      Controls


     Fold in the mirror in a car wash                ▷ Keep the photocells clean.
       Before entering an automatic car wash,        ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the       rearview mirror and the windshield.
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
                                                     Steering wheel
Automatic heating
Depending on the external temperature, both          General information
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when             Do not adjust while driving
the engine is running or the ignition is switched          Do not adjust the steering wheel while
on.                                                  driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
                                                     could result in an accident.◀
Interior rearview mirror

Reducing the blinding effect                         Adjusting




                                                     1. Fold the lever down.
From behind when driving at night: turn the
knob.                                                2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
                                                        height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
                                                        tion.
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic
dimming feature                                      3. Fold the lever back.
                                                           Do not use force to swing the lever back.
                                                           Do not use force to swing the lever back
                                                     up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐
                                                     aged.◀

                                                     Steering wheel heating

                                                     Switching on/off
                                                             Press the button.
Two photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass, see arrow.                    ▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ On the back of the mirror.                         ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
For proper operation:


                                                                                             49
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Transporting children safely



Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment                                      passenger side are deactivated. Automatic de‐
                                                       activation of front passenger airbags, refer to
This chapter describes all series equipment as         page 86.
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also             Deactivating the front passenger airbags
describes equipment that may not be found in                  If a child restraint fixing system is used in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected         the front passenger seat, the front passenger
special equipment or the country version. This         airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐      an increased risk of injury to the child when the
tems.                                                  airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
                                                       fixing system.◀

The right place for children
                                                       Installing child restraint fixing
Note
                                                       systems
      Children in the vehicle
      Do not leave children unattended in the          Notes
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐                Manufacturer's information for child re‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the               straint fixing systems
doors.◀
                                                       To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
                                                       systems, observe the information provided by
Children should always be in the rear                  the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
Accident research shows that the safest place          tective effect can be impaired.◀
for children is on the rear seat.
      Transporting children in the rear                On the front passenger seat
      Transport children younger than 13 years         After installing a child restraint fixing system on
of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear only,   the front passenger seat, ensure that the front
using child restraint fixing systems suitable for      and side airbags on the front passenger side are
the age, weight, and height of the child; other‐       deactivated.
wise, there is an increased risk of injury in an ac‐         Deactivating the front passenger airbags
cident.
                                                              If a child restraint fixing system is used in
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a          the front passenger seat, the front passenger
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint      airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their      an increased risk of injury to the child when the
age, weight and size.◀                                 airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
                                                       fixing system.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint        Seat position and height
fixing system on the front passenger seat, make        Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
sure that the front and side airbags on the front      move the front passenger seat as far back as


     50
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                               Transporting children safely       Controls


possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐     2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
sition to obtain the best possible position for the   3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event        pletely.
of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height after
this.                                                 LATCH child restraint fixing
                                                      system
Backrest width
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system       LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
on the front passenger seat, open the backrest
width, refer to page 44, completely. Do not           Note
change the backrest width after this.                       Manufacturer's information for LATCH
      Backrest width for the child seat                     child restraint fixing systems

       Before installing a child restraint fixing     To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest      ing systems, observe the operating and safety
width must be opened completely. Do not               information from the system manufacturer; oth‐
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the      erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
                                                      Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Child seat security                                         Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
                                                            chors
                                                      Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
                                                      properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
                                                      ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
                                                      rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
                                                      may be reduced.◀




The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.

Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with      The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
   the belt.                                          located behind the indicated cover caps.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
                                                      Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
   pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
                                                      ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐
   system. The safety belt is locked.
                                                      straint fixing system.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.


                                                                                                51
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Transporting children safely


Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing                 Outer rear seats
systems
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
   to the operating instructions of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
   erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap

Mounting points                                       1   Direction of travel
                                                      2   Head restraint
                                                      3   Cargo area floor
                                                      4   Hook for upper retaining strap
                                                      5   Mounting point/eye
                                                      6   Backrest
                                                      7   Upper retaining strap

                                                      When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re‐
There are three mounting points, see arrows, for      taining strap between the rear seat backrest and
the upper retaining strap of LATCH child re‐          the cargo cover.
straint fixing systems.

      LATCH mounting eyes
       Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀

Retaining strap guide
      Retaining strap
       Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it
passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
will not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in the event of an accident.◀




     52
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                               Transporting children safely       Controls


Center rear seat                                       On center rear seat:

                                                       1. Route the upper retaining strap over the
                                                          middle of the head restraint.
                                                       2. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
                                                          mounting eye.
                                                       3. Pull the retaining strap taut until it com‐
                                                          presses the cushion of the head restraint,
                                                          thus preventing the strap from sliding off.


1   Direction of travel
                                                       Locking the doors and
2   Head restraint                                     windows
3   Cargo area floor
4   Hook for upper retaining strap                     Rear doors
5   Mounting point/eye
6   Backrest
7   Upper retaining strap

When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re‐
taining strap between the rear seat backrest and
the cargo cover.


                                                       Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
                                                       The door can now be opened from the outside
                                                       only.


                                                       Safety switch for the rear
                                                               Press the button on the driver's door if
                                                               children are being transported in the
Attaching the upper retaining strap to                 rear.
the mounting point                                     This locks the rear window switches so that the
On outer rear seats:                                   windows cannot be operated from the rear:
                                                       safety switch, refer to page 41.
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
   supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
   mounting eye.
4. Pull the retaining strap taut.
5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐
   sition.


                                                                                               53
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls     Driving



Driving
Vehicle equipment                                    Before removing the remote control, push it all
                                                     the way in to release the locking mechanism.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                     ▷ The ignition is switched off if it was on.
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                     Automatic transmission
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected       You can only take out the remote control if trans‐
special equipment or the country version. This       mission position P is engaged: interlock.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
                                                     Start/Stop button
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock




                                                     Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
                                                     nition on or off and starts the engine.

                                                     The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed
                                                     when you press the Start/Stop button.
Insert the remote control all the way into the ig‐
                                                     Radio ready state
nition lock.
                                                     Individual electrical consumers can operate.
▷ Radio ready state is switched on. Individual
                                                     The time and the external temperature are dis‐
  electrical consumers can operate.
                                                     played in the instrument cluster.

Comfort Access                                       Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only     ▷ When the remote control is removed from
insert the remote control into the ignition lock,      the ignition lock.
refer to page 36, under special circumstances.       ▷ In cars with Comfort Access, refer to
                                                       page 36, by touching the surface above the
Removing the remote control from the                   door lock.
ignition lock
      Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
                                                     Ignition on
      of the ignition lock                           All electrical consumers can operate. The od‐
                                                     ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the
                                                     instrument cluster.
ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀


     54
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                    Driving     Controls


To save battery power when the engine is off,       Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary         vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
electronic systems/power consumers.                 away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Radio ready state and ignition off                  Starting the engine
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster go out.

Automatic transmission, 8-gear
In certain situations, transmission position P is
engaged automatically. To make it possible for
the vehicle to roll, such as in an automatic car
wash, follow the instructions in Car washes, re‐
fer to page 259.

                                                    Automatic transmission
Starting the engine                                 Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Com‐
                                                    fort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 36.
General information
                                                    1. Depress the brake pedal.
     Enclosed areas
                                                    2. Engage transmission position P if neces‐
     Do not let the engine run in enclosed             sary.
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
                                                    3. Press the Start/Stop button.
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an       The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀       tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
                                                    starts.
     Unattended vehicle
       Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐     Engine stop
tial source of danger.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,     General information
shift to neutral or engage transmission posi‐             Take the remote control with you
tion P and set the handbrake firmly; otherwise,           Take the remote control with you when
the vehicle may begin to roll.◀                     leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
     Frequent starting in quick succession          cannot operate the windows and injure them‐
                                                    selves.◀
      Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in          Set the handbrake and further secure the
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not              vehicle as required
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is      Set the handbrake firmly when parking; other‐
the danger of overheating and damaging the          wise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upward and
catalytic converter.◀                               downward inclines, further secure the vehicle,
                                                    for example, by turning the steering wheel in the
                                                    direction of the curb.◀


                                                                                              55
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Driving


Before driving into a car wash                      ▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an     the vehicle is at a standstill.
automatic car wash, follow the information on       ▷ The driver's safety belt is fastened or the
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to             driver's door is closed.
page 259.                                           When the engine is switched off, the air volume
                                                    of the automatic climate control is reduced.
Switching off the engine
                                                    Indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
Automatic transmission
                                                              The indicator lamp lights up when the
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
                                                              Auto Start/Stop function is ready to
   hicle stopped.
                                                              start the engine automatically.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the handbrake firmly.                                  The indicator lamp lights up if the re‐
                                                              quirements for an automatic engine
4. Remove the remote control from the ignition
                                                              stop are not fulfilled.
   lock, refer to page 54.

                                                    Note
Automatic Engine Start/Stop                         The engine is not switched off automatically in
Function                                            the following situations:
                                                    ▷ External temperatures below ap‐
The concept                                           prox. 37 ℉/+3 ℃.
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.       ▷ High external temperature and operation of
The system switches off the engine during a           the automatic climate control.
stop, for instance in congestion or at traffic
                                                    ▷ The interior is not yet heated or cooled as
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
                                                      much as desired.
engine starts automatically when you wish to
drive away.                                         ▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
                                                      ture.
Certain vehicle components may experience
additional wear as a result of this system.         ▷ Sharp steering angle or the steering wheel
                                                      is being turned.
Automatic operation                                 ▷ After driving in reverse.
The automatic engine Start/Stop function is op‐     ▷ Fogging of the windows when the automatic
erational after each engine start.                    climate control is switched on.
The function is activated at a certain speed:       ▷ Vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ Automatic transmission: at 5 mph/9 km/h.          ▷ Hood is unlocked.
                                                    ▷ HDC is activated.
Automatic engine stop
                                                    ▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
The engine is switched off automatically during
                                                    ▷ The selector lever is in position N or S/M.
a stop under the following conditions:
Automatic transmission:                                       The indicator lamp is lit.

▷ The selector lever is in transmission position
  D.



     56
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     Driving    Controls


Parking the vehicle during an                        ▷ The vehicle begins to roll.
automatic engine stop                                ▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
The vehicle can be parked safely during an au‐         position is changed from D to N, R or M/S.
tomatic engine stop, such as when you wish to        ▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
leave the vehicle.                                     position is changed from P to N, D, R or M/
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is        S.
   switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function        ▷ Fogging of the windows when the automatic
   is deactivated.                                     climate control is switched on.
    Automatic transmission: transmission posi‐       ▷ Vehicle battery charge is very low.
    tion P is engaged automatically.                 ▷ The interior has cooled down strongly with
2. Set the handbrake.                                  the heating switched on.
Start the engine as usual using the Start/Stop       ▷ Low braking pressure, such as from de‐
button.                                                pressing the brake pedal a number of times
                                                       consecutively.
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐       Preventing automatic engine stop with
lowing conditions to enable the driver to drive      an automatic transmission
away:
                                                     The concept
▷ Automatic transmission:
                                                     To permit the driver to drive away especially
    The brake pedal is released.
                                                     quickly, such as at intersections, the automatic
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.        engine stop can be actively prevented.

Safety mode                                          Preventing the engine stop using the
The engine does not start by itself after it is      brake pedal
switched off automatically if any of the following   The engine stop can be actively prevented
conditions are fulfilled:                            within one second after the vehicle comes to a
▷ The driver's safety belt is unfastened or the      standstill.
  driver's door is open.                             ▷ Depress the brake pedal briefly and force‐
▷ Hood was unlocked.                                   fully immediately after the vehicle comes to
                                                       a standstill.
         The indicator lamp lights up. A mes‐
         sage appears on the Control Display.        ▷ Then continue depressing the brake pedal
                                                       with normal braking force.
         The engine can only be started via the
Start/Stop button.


Note
Even if you do not wish to drive away, the stop‐
ped engine still starts automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ The interior has heated up strongly with the
  cooling function switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.


                                                                                             57
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls     Driving


Activating/deactivating the system                    Indicator lamp
manually                                                      The indicator lamp lights up and an
                                                              acoustic signal sounds when driving
                                                              away. The handbrake is still set.


                                                      Setting
                                                      The lever engages automatically.

                                                      Releasing


         Press the button.
▷ LED lights up: the Auto Start/Stop function
  is deactivated.
    The engine is started during an automatic
    engine stop.
    The engine can only be stopped or started
    via the Start/Stop button.
                                                      Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the
▷ LED goes out: the Auto Start/Stop function          lever.
  is activated.

                                                      Notes
Automatic deactivation
                                                            Using the handbrake while driving
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically in the interest          If it should become necessary to use the
of safety, for example if the driver's absence is     handbrake while driving, do not pull the hand‐
detected.                                             brake too forcefully. Keep the button on the
                                                      handbrake lever pressed at all times.
Malfunction                                           Excessive application of the handbrake can
                                                      block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of
          The indicator lamp lights up. The au‐
                                                      the vehicle.◀
          tomatic engine start/stop function no
          longer switches of the engine auto‐         To prevent corrosion and uneven brake action,
matically.A message appears on the Control            lightly apply the handbrake from time to time
Display. It is possible to continue driving. Have     when coasting, traffic conditions permitting.
the system checked.
                                                      The brake lamps do not light up when the hand‐
                                                      brake is pulled.

Handbrake
The concept
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes
the rear wheels.


    58
                             Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                      Driving     Controls



Turn signal, high beams,                              3. "Triple turn signal"
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
      Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
      While driving and when using the turn sig‐
nal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in the
exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional turn
signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not be in
the appropriate position and will be difficult to
detect.◀                                              The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
                                                      rently in use.

                                                      High beams, headlamp flasher




Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
sistance point.                                       1   High beams
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐    2   Headlamp flasher
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
                                                      Washer/wiper system
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to
                                                      Notes
flash.
                                                           Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Triple turn signal activation                              Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐
Press the lever to the resistance point.              zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
                                                      blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
The turn signal flashes three times.
                                                      damaged.◀
This function can be activated or deactivated:
                                                           Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield
1. "Settings"
                                                             Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield;
2. "Lighting"
                                                      otherwise, the wiper blades may wear more rap‐
                                                      idly or become damaged.◀




                                                                                               59
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Driving


At a glance                                          Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
                                                     If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
                                                     intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
                                                     If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
                                                     between wipes is controlled automatically and
                                                     depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
                                                     The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,
                                                     directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

                                                     Activating intermittent wipe or the rain
1   Switching on wipers                              sensor
2   Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3   Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
    the rain sensor
4   Cleaning the windshield and headlamps
5   Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sen‐
    sitivity of the rain sensor


Switching on wipers
Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.               Press the button, arrow 3.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐   The LED in the steering wheel stalk lights up and
sition when released.                                a wiping cycle is started.

Normal wiper speed
                                                     Setting intermittent wipe or the
Press up once.                                       sensitivity of the rain sensor
The system switches to operation in the inter‐       Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
                                                     Deactivating intermittent wipe or the
Fast wiper speed                                     rain sensor
Press up twice or press once beyond the resist‐      Press the button again, arrow 3.
ance point.
                                                     The LED goes out.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.                                     Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
                                                           Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
Switching off wipers or brief wipe                   through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐
Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2.                 age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐
                                                     tion.◀
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
                                                     Cleaning the windshield and
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.                       headlamps
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.        Pull the lever, arrow 4.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.


     60
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                      Driving      Controls


The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐          2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
shield and activates the wipers briefly.                move to their resting position and are ready
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on,        for operation.
the headlamps are cleaned at regular and ap‐
propriate intervals.                                 Rear window wiper
      Do not use the washer system at freezing
      temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
                                                     1   Intermittent wipe
                                                         When reverse gear is engaged, the system
Windshield washer nozzles
                                                         switches to continuous operation.
The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐
                                                     2   Cleaning the rear window
tomatically while the engine is running or the ig‐
nition is switched on.                               The rear window wiper does not move if the lever
                                                     is in position 1 before the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
                                                     To switch on the rear window wiper:
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.                1. Move the lever to its basic position.
                                                     2. Select the required position again.
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the                Do not use the washing mechanisms
   wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐              when the washer fluid reservoir is empty
   shield.                                           Do not use washing mechanisms when the
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of      washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you
   resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,     will damage the washer pump.◀
   until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical
   position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the           Washer fluid
washer/wiper system, refer to page 59, must be
reactivated.                                         General information
      Fold the wipers back down                            Antifreeze for washer fluid
      Before switching the ignition on, fold the           Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,       it away from sources of ignition.
the wipers may become damaged when they are          Only keep it in the closed original container and
switched on.◀                                        inaccessible to children.
1. Switch on the ignition.                           Follow the instructions on the container.◀




                                                                                                61
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Driving


Washer fluid reservoir                               Disengaging the remote control
      Adding washer fluid                            To remove the remote control from the ignition
                                                     lock, first move the selector lever to position P
      Only add washer fluid when the engine is
                                                     and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the
cool, and then close the cover completely to
                                                     remote control from the ignition lock, refer to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
                                                     page 54.
engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk    Selector lever positions
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
                                                     P R N D M/S + –

                                                     Displays in the instrument cluster




All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer    The selector lever position is displayed and the
antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐     engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
ommendations.                                        manual mode.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.                            Changing selector lever positions
                                                     ▷ With the ignition switched on or the engine
Capacity                                               running, the selector lever can be moved out
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.                        of position P.
                                                     ▷ When the vehicle is stationary, step on the
                                                       brake before shifting out of P or N; other‐
Automatic transmission with                            wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.
Steptronic, 6-gear                                             Press on the brake pedal until you start
In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears                 driving
can also be shifted manually using Steptronic,           To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
refer to page 63.                                        you select a driving position, maintain pres‐
                                                         sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
Parking the vehicle                                      to start.◀
      Secure the vehicle
       Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, move the selector lever to position P
and set the handbrake; otherwise, the vehicle
will begin moving.◀



    62
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                      Driving     Controls


                                                      Sport program and manual mode M/S

                                                      Activating the Sport program




A lock prevents you from inadvertently engaging
selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the
lock, press the button on the front of the selector
lever, see arrow.
                                                      Move the selector lever from position D toward
                                                      the left.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The       DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
rear wheels are locked.                               This position is recommended for a perform‐
                                                      ance-oriented driving style.
R is Reverse
                                                      To deactivate the Sport program or manual
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.           mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
                                                      into position D.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The         Activating the M/S manual mode
vehicle can roll.                                     Move the selector lever from position D toward
                                                      the left.
D Drive, automatic position
                                                      Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
                                                      Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
ward gears are selected automatically.
                                                      changed.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
                                                      The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
                                                      cluster, e.g., M1.
sition D.
                                                      ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
Kickdown                                                ward.
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving           ▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond            ward.
the resistance point at the full throttle position.   The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
                                                      engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
                                                      down if the engine speed is too high. The se‐
                                                      lected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument
                                                      panel, followed by the current gear.




                                                                                                63
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Driving


Shifting gears using the shift paddles               3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever un‐
on the steering wheel                                   til the sleeve is inside out.
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ When the shift paddles on the steering
  wheel are used to shift gears while in auto‐
  matic mode, the transmission switches to
  manual mode.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to accelerate
  or shift gears for a certain amount of time,
  the transmission switches back to auto‐            4. Using the screwdriver from the tool kit, refer
  matic mode.                                           to page 245, press the red lever while mov‐
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane,         ing the selector lever to the desired position
manual mode remains active.                             with the button pressed.



                                                     Automatic transmission with
                                                     Steptronic, 8-gear
                                                     Transmission positions

                                                     D Drive, automatic position
                                                     Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
                                                     ward gears are available.
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle +.
                                                     Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle –.
                                                     sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate    sition D.
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high. The se‐        Kickdown
lected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument   Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
panel, followed by the current gear.                 performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
                                                     the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Overriding selector lever lock
If the selector lever is locked in position P al‐    R is Reverse
though the ignition is switched on, the brake is     Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
depressed, and the button on the selector lever
is pressed, the selector lever lock can be over‐     N is Neutral
ridden:                                              The vehicle can roll.
1. Switch off the ignition.                          N remains engaged after the engine is switched
2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.          off if the remote control remains in the ignition
                                                     lock. This function can be used in an automatic
                                                     car wash, refer to page 259, for example. P is
                                                     automatically engaged after approx. 30 minutes.

     64
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                       Driving     Controls


P Park                                               Engaging transmission positions D, R,
The drive wheels are blocked.                        N
P is engaged automatically when the following
conditions are met:
▷ The driver's door is opened while the engine
  is running, the safety belt is not fastened and
  neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator
  is activated.
▷ The engine is switched off unless N is en‐
  gaged and the remote control is in the igni‐
  tion lock.
                                                     Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
▷ The remote control is removed from the ig‐
                                                     rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
  nition lock.
                                                     When shifting out of P or into R, simultaneously
Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the trans‐   push the unlock button 1.
mission position P is engaged; otherwise, the
                                                     The engaged transmission position is displayed
vehicle may begin to roll.
                                                     on the selector lever.

Engaging transmission position                       After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
                                                     center position.
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
  gaged if the engine is running and the brake
  pedal is pressed.                                  Engaging transmission position P
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the          Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
  brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
  otherwise, the shift command will not be
  executed: shift lock.
      Press on the brake pedal until you start
      driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a driving position, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀

                                                     Press button P.




                                                                                                 65
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Driving


Sport program and manual mode M/S                   Shifting gears using the shift paddles
                                                    on the steering wheel
Activating the Sport program                        The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly
                                                    change gears since both hands can remain on
                                                    the steering wheel.
                                                    ▷ If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
                                                      used to shift gears while in automatic mode
                                                      D, the transmission temporarily switches to
                                                      manual mode.
                                                    ▷ If the shift paddles are not used to accelerate
                                                      or shift gears for a certain amount of time,
                                                      the transmission switches back to auto‐
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐     matic mode D.
mission position D.                                 With the transmission position M/S selected,
                                                    the manual mode remains active.
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.

Activating manual mode
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is          ▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
changed.
                                                    ▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
                                                    The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
cluster, e.g., M1.
                                                    engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐      down if the engine speed is too high.
  ward.
                                                    The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐       strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
  ward.
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission does
not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument panel, followed by the current gear.

Ending the Sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.


     66
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                  Driving   Controls


Displays in the instrument cluster




The transmission position is displayed and the
engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
manual mode.




                                                                                       67
                     Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Displays



Displays
Vehicle equipment                                   The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
                                                    rently in use.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment      Time, external temperature display
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                    Set the time, refer to page 72.
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
                                                    External temperature warning
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐   If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
tems.                                               sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is
                                                    the increased danger of ice.
                                                         Ice on roads
Odometer, external                                        Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
temperature display, clock                          there can be a risk of ice on roads.
                                                    Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
                                                    roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
                                                    ger of an accident.◀

                                                    Odometer and trip odometer
                                                    Resetting trip odometer:
                                                    With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
                                                    the instrument cluster.

1   Knob in the instrument cluster
                                                    When the vehicle is parked
2   External temperature display and clock
                                                    If you still want to view the time, external tem‐
3   Odometer and trip odometer                      perature and odometer reading briefly after the
                                                    remote control has been taken out of the ignition
Knob in the instrument cluster                      lock:

Press the knob.                                     Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
  odometer is reset.
▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time,
  external temperature and odometer are dis‐
  played.

Units of measure
To set the respective units of measure, miles or
km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the external
temperature, refer to page 72.



    68
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                   Displays       Controls



Tachometer                                          Engine oil temperature




Never force the engine speed up into the red        ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel     perature end. Drive at moderate engine and
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.          vehicle speeds.
                                                    ▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer
                                                      is in the middle or in the right half of the tem‐
Coolant temperature                                   perature display.
                                                    ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and       perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi‐       diately and allow it to cool down.
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis‐
play.                                               If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes‐
Check the coolant level, refer to page 242.         sage appears on the Control Display.
                                                    Check the oil level, refer to page 239.

Current fuel consumption
                                                    Fuel gauge




Displays the current fuel consumption. You can
check whether you are currently driving in an ef‐   The vehicle inclination may cause the display to
ficient and environmentally-friendly manner.        vary.
                                                    The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates
                                                    the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler flap.

                                                    Notes on refueling, refer to page 224.

                                                    Range
                                                    After the reserve range is reached:


                                                                                                69
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Displays


▷ A message is briefly displayed on the Con‐        ▷ Current fuel consumption.
  trol Display.                                     ▷ No information.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the com‐          To set the corresponding units of measure, refer
  puter.                                            to page 72.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
  as when corners are taken rapidly, engine         Information in detail
  functions are not ensured.
The message appears continuously below a            Range
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.                    Displays the estimated cruising range available
                                                    with the remaining fuel.
     Refuel promptly
                                                    It is calculated based on your driving style over
      At the latest, refuel at a range of
                                                    the last 18 miles/30 km.
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
                                                    Average speed
                                                    Periods in which the vehicle was parked and the
                                                    engine was switched off manually are not in‐
Computer                                            cluded in the average speed calculations.

Displaying information on the                       With the trip computer, refer to page 70, you
instrument panel                                    can have the average speed displayed for an ad‐
                                                    ditional distance.
                                                    To reset the average speed: press the button on
                                                    the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

                                                    Average fuel consumption
                                                    This is calculated for the period during which the
                                                    engine is running.
                                                    You can have the average consumption for an‐
                                                    other trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Press the computer button on the turn signal        Control Display below.
lever.                                              To reset the average consumption: press the
                                                    button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐
Information is displayed in the instrument clus‐    prox. 2 seconds.
ter.
                                                    Current fuel consumption
Overview of the information
                                                    Displays the current fuel consumption. You can
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐     check whether you are currently driving in an ef‐
nal lever displays the information on the instru‐   ficient and environmentally-friendly manner.
ment cluster in the following order:
▷ Range.                                            Displays on the Control Display
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.                              Display the computer or trip computer on the
▷ Average speed.                                    Control Display.

▷ Average fuel consumption.                         1. "Vehicle Info"



    70
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                 Displays     Controls


2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"               Resetting the fuel consumption and
                                                   speed
                                                   Resetting the values for average speed and
                                                   average fuel consumption:
                                                   1. Select the respective menu item and press
                                                      the controller.
                                                   2. Press the controller again to confirm your
                                                      selection.

                                                   Resetting the trip computer
Displays on the "Onboard info":
                                                   Resetting all values:
                                                   1. "Vehicle Info"
                                                   2. "Trip computer"
                                                   3. "Reset"



                                                   Settings and information
                                                   Operating concept
▷ Range.                                           Certain settings and information can only be
▷ Distance to destination.                         called up when the ignition is switched on. A
▷ Estimated time of arrival if a destination was   number of settings cannot be made while driv‐
  entered in the navigation system, refer to       ing.
  page 140.
Displays on the "Trip computer":




                                                   1   Button for:
                                                       ▷ Selecting the display.
▷ Departure time.                                      ▷ Setting values.
▷ Trip duration.                                   2   Button for:
▷ Trip distance.                                       ▷ Confirming the selected display or set
Both displays show:                                      values.

▷ Average fuel consumption and                         ▷ Calling up computer information  70.

▷ Average speed.



                                                                                          71
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls     Displays



Symbol          Function                             Units of measure
                With the lights switched on:         The units for fuel consumption, route/distance,
                Dimming instrument lighting,         temperature, and pressure can be changed.
                refer to page 83                     1. "Settings"
                                                     2. "Language/Units"

                Calling up Check Control, refer
                to page 77




                Checking the engine oil level,
                refer to page 239


                                                     3. Select the desired menu item.
                                                     4. Select the desired unit.
                Setting the time, refer to
                page 72                              The settings are stored for the remote control
                                                     currently in use.



                Setting the date, refer to
                                                     Clock
                page 73
                                                     Setting the time

                                                     In the instrument cluster
                                                     To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the
                Viewing service requirement
                                                     time format below.
                display, refer to page 75
                                                     1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
                                                        or down repeatedly until the appropriate
                                                        symbol appears in the display, accompanied
                                                        by the time and the word "SET".
Exiting displays
The external temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you make
no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required,
complete the current setting first.




                                                     2. Press button 2.



     72
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                  Displays      Controls


3. Use button 1 to set the hours.                  3. "Time:"
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
     The system accepts the new time.

Via the iDrive

1.        Press the button.
                                                   4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
     The main menu is displayed.                      are displayed, and then press the controller.
                                                   5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
                                                      are displayed, and then press the controller.
                                                   The time is stored.

                                                   Setting the time format
                                                   1. "Settings"
                                                   2. "Time/Date"
                                                   3. "Format:"
2. "Settings"                                      4. Select the desired format.
                                                   The time format is stored.
                                                   The settings are stored for the remote control
                                                   currently in use.



                                                   Date
                                                   The settings are stored for the remote control
                                                   currently in use, Personal Profile, refer to
                                                   page 30.
Setting the time zone
                                                   Setting the date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"                                     In the instrument cluster
3. "Time zone:"                                    To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
4. Select the desired time zone.                   to Setting the date format below.
The time zone is stored.                           1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
                                                      or down repeatedly until the appropriate
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"



                                                                                           73
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Displays


   symbol appears in the display, accompanied      3. "Format:"
   by the date and the word "SET".                 4. Select the desired format.




2. Press button 2.                                 The date format is stored.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.     Settings on the Control
6. Press button 2.
                                                   Display
   The system stores the new date.                 Language
Via the iDrive                                     Setting the language
1. "Settings"                                      1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"                                     2. "Language/Units"
3. "Date:"                                         3. "Language:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
   displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Make the necessary settings for the month
   and year.
The date is stored.

Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
                                                   4. Select the desired language.
                                                   The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
                                                   rently in use.

                                                   Setting the voice dialog
                                                   Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐
                                                   fer to page 26.




    74
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                  Displays       Controls


Brightness                                          The current service requirements can be read
                                                    out from the remote control by the service spe‐
Setting the brightness                              cialist.
The brightness is automatically adapted to the      For certain maintenance operations, you can
ambient lighting conditions. However, the basic     view the distance remaining or the due date for
setting can be adjusted.                            that operation in the instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"                                       1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 54.
2. "Control display"                                2. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
3. "Brightness"                                        lever up or down repeatedly until the appro‐
                                                       priate symbol appears in the display, ac‐
                                                       companied by the words "SERVICE INFO".




4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
   is selected.
                                                    3. Press button 2.
5. Press the controller.
                                                    4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
                                                       service items.
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐      Displays
ness control may not be clearly visible.
                                                     Symbol              Function

Service requirements                                                     Service requirements




                                                                         Engine oil




The remaining driving distance and the date of                           Roadworthiness test
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.




                                                                                            75
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Displays



Symbol              Function                        To exit from the menu:
                                                    Move the controller to the left.
                    Front brake pads
                                                    Symbols

                                                    Symbols        Description

                                                                   No service is currently required.
                    Rear brake pads


                                                                   The deadline for service or a le‐
                                                                   gally mandated inspection is
                                                                   approaching.
                    Brake fluid
                                                                   The service deadline has al‐
                                                                   ready passed.


                                                    Entering dates
The sequence of displayed service items may         Enter the dates for the required inspections.
vary. First the data for the next maintenance are   Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
displayed.                                          correctly, refer to page 73.
                                                    1. "Vehicle Info"
Detailed information on service
requirements                                        2. "Vehicle status"

More information on the scope of service re‐        3.        "Service required"
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.     4. "§ Vehicle inspection"

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"




                                                    5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
                                                    6. "Date:"

3.        "Service required"                        7. Create the settings.

Required maintenance procedures and legally         8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The
mandated inspections are displayed.                    year is highlighted.

Additional information can be displayed on each     9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
entry:                                              10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The
Select the entry and press the controller.              date entry is stored.


     76
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                   Displays     Controls


To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.

Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
                                                      The symbol indicates that Check Control
notified.
                                                    messages have been stored. The Check Control
1. "Vehicle Info"                                   messages can be displayed later.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".                                  Text messages
4. "Last Service Request"                           Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
                                                    Display in combination with a symbol in the in‐
                                                    strument cluster explain a Check Control mes‐
Check Control                                       sage and the meaning of the indicator and warn‐
                                                    ing lamps.
The concept
                                                    Supplementary text messages
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐      Addition information, such as on the cause of a
tems monitored.                                     fault or the required action, can be called up via
                                                    Check Control.
A Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and,    In urgent cases, this information will be shown
in some circumstances, an acoustic signal and       as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
text messages at the top of the Control Display.
                                                    Symbols
Indicator/warning lamps                             The following functions can be selected within
                                                    the supplementary text message, depending on
                                                    the Check Control message.
                                                    ▷       "Service request"
                                                        Contact the service partner.
                                                    ▷      "Roadside Assistance"
                                                        Contact Roadside Assistance.



The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.


                                                                                              77
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls     Displays


Hiding Check Control messages                            companied by the words "CHECK CON‐
                                                         TROL".




Press the computer button in the turn signal
lever.                                              2. Press button 2.
                                                         If there is no Check Control message, this is
Some Check Control messages are displayed
                                                         indicated by "CHECK OK“. If a Check Con‐
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
                                                         trol message has been stored, the corre‐
cannot be hidden.
                                                         sponding lamp comes on. It is accompanied
If several malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐          by a text message on the Control Display.
sages are displayed consecutively.
                                                    3. Press button 1 to check for other messages.
         They are marked with the symbol shown      4. Press button 2.
         here.
                                                         The display again shows the external tem‐
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐              perature and the time.
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However,
they are stored and can be displayed again later.   Displaying stored Check Control
                                                    messages
         They are marked with the symbol shown
         here.                                      1. "Vehicle Info"
                                                    2. "Vehicle status"
                                                    3.      "Check Control"
Viewing stored Check Control
messages                                            4. Select the text message.
1. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
   lever up or down repeatedly until the appro‐     Messages after trip completion
   priate symbol appears in the display, ac‐        Special messages that were displayed during a
                                                    trip are displayed again after the ignition is
                                                    switched off.



                                                    Speed limit
                                                    Entry of a speed limit which, when reached,
                                                    should cause a Check Control message to be
                                                    issued.
                                                    Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be‐
                                                    low the set speed limit once by at least
                                                    3 mph/5 km/h.


    78
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                  Displays   Controls


Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"




4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
   displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.

Applying your current speed as the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.

Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"




                                                                                        79
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Controls     Lamps



Lamps
Vehicle equipment                                      Parking lamps
                                                       Switch position           : the vehicle lamps light
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                       up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also       Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
describes equipment that may not be found in           riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected         charged and it would then be impossible to start
special equipment or the country version. This         the engine.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐      When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
tems.                                                  one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
                                                       page 82.

At a glance                                            Low beams
                                                       Switch position      with the ignition switched
                                                       on: the low beams light up.

                                                       Welcome lamps
                                                       When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
                                                       position     or      : the parking and interior
                                                       lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
                                                       locked.


1    Automatic headlamp control / adaptive light       Activating/deactivating the welcome
     control / high-beam Assistant / welcome           lamps
     lamps / daytime running lights                    1. "Settings"
2    Lamps off / daytime running lights                2. "Lighting"
3    Parking lamps / daytime running lights            3. "Welcome light"
4    Low beams/welcome lamps
5    Fog lamps



Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
General information
If the driver's door is opened while the ignition is   The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off    rently in use.
automatically in the following switch settings:
0,      ,



     80
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                        Lamps     Controls


Headlamp courtesy delay feature                       Daytime running lights
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the    The daytime running lights light up in posi‐
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched   tion 0,       and      . After the ignition is
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.          switched off, the parking lamps light up in posi‐
                                                      tion      .
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"                                         Activating/deactivating
2. "Lighting"                                         1. "Settings"

3. "Pathway light.: s"                                2. "Lighting"
                                                      3. "Daytime running lamps"




4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐     The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.                                        rently in use.

Automatic headlamp control
Switch position        : the low beams are switched   Adaptive light control
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐
light or if there is precipitation. The LED next to   The concept
the symbol lights up.                                 Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
                                                      control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
                                                      tion of the road surface.
cause the lights to be switched on.
                                                      Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
The low beams remain switched on independ‐
                                                      rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
ent of the ambient lighting conditions when you
                                                      the course of the road.
switch on the front fog lamps.
                                                      In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during turn‐
      Personal responsibility
                                                      ing, up to a certain speed one of the two front
      The automatic headlamp control cannot           fog lamps is switched on as a turning lamp. This
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment      provides improved illumination of the area inside
in determining when the lamps should be               the curve.
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.                                           Controls
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you       Activating
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐        Switch position      with the ignition switched
der these conditions.◀                                on.


                                                                                                81
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls     Lamps


The turning lamps are automatically switched         periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not
on depending on the steering angle or the use        have enough power to start the engine.
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive     Switching off
Light Control does not swivel to the driver's side   Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
when the vehicle is at a standstill.                 to the pressure point, arrow 3.
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are
active.
                                                     High-beam Assistant
Malfunction
                                                     The concept
          The warning lamp lights up.A mes‐
          sage appears on the Control Display.       When the lights are switched on, this system
          Adaptive light control is malfunction‐     automatically switches the high beams on and
ing or has failed. Have the system checked as        off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on
soon as possible.                                    the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐
                                                     sistant ensures that the high beams are
                                                     switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
                                                     lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
High beams/roadside parking                          switch the high beams on and off as usual.
lamps
                                                     Activating the High-beam Assistant
                                                     1. Turn the light switch to       .
                                                     2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
                                                        push the turn indicator lever in the direction
                                                        of the high beam.
                                                             The indicator lamp in the instrument
                                                             cluster lights up. The high beams are
                                                             switched on and off automatically.
                                                     The system responds to light from oncoming
1   High beams                                       traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
2   Headlamp flasher                                 equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
3   Roadside parking lamps
                                                     Switching the high beams on and off
                                                     manually
Left and right roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point for ap‐
prox. 2 seconds, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery.
Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long
                                                     ▷ High beams on, arrow 1.


     82
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     Lamps       Controls


▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.         ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
                                                      ence of highly reflective signs.
To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, briefly
                                                    ▷ At low speeds.
push the turn indicator lever toward the high
beams.                                              ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
                                                      rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
Activating/deactivating via iDrive                    ered with stickers, etc.
1. "Settings"                                       ▷ If the sensor view field is dirty.
2. "Lighting"                                           The view field of the sensor is located on the
                                                        front of the interior rearview mirror.
3. "High beam assistant"
                                                        Do not cover this area with stickers, etc.
                                                        Clean the sensor view field with a cloth mois‐
                                                        tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.



                                                    Fog lamps
                                                    Front fog lamps
                                                    The parking lamps or low beams must be
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐   switched on.
rently in use.                                               Press the button. The green indicator
                                                             lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
System limits
                                                    If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
      Personal responsibility
                                                    page 81, is activated, the low beams will come
       The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as      on automatically when you switch on the fog
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment     lamps.
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀     Instrument lighting
The system is not fully functional in situations    The parking lamps or low beams must be
such as the following, and driver intervention      switched on to adjust the brightness.
may be necessary:
                                                    1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
                                                       the appropriate symbol appears in the dis‐
  such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
  pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
  wagons; when driving close to train or ship
  traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
  in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
  traffic on freeways.




                                                                                              83
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls     Lamps


    play, accompanied by the brightness setting
    and the word "SET".




                                                    Switching the interior lamps on and off

2. Press button 2.                                           Press the button.

3. Push button 1 up or down to select the de‐
                                                    To switch off permanently: press the button for
   sired brightness level.
                                                    approx. 3 seconds.
                                                    To clear this setting: briefly press the button.

                                                    Reading lamps
                                                             Press the button.

                                                    Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
                                                    next to the interior lamps.
                                                          Danger of burns
4. Press button 2.
                                                         Do not reach into the opening of the lamps;
    The display again shows the external tem‐       otherwise, there is a risk of burns.◀
    perature and the time.
                                                    Ambient lighting
                                                    Depending on the equipment, the interior light‐
Interior lamps                                      ing can be set individually for some lamps.
General information
                                                    Selecting the color scheme
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps,
                                                    1. "Settings"
trunk lamps, and courtesy lamps are controlled
automatically.                                      2. "Lighting"
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the      3. "Ambient:"
door handles and illuminate the ground in front     4. Select the desired setting.
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside
the car are switched off about 8 minutes after
the ignition is switched off, Start/Stop button,
refer to page 54.




    84
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                       Safety   Controls



Safety
Vehicle equipment                                   describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                    your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as      special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment      also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also    tems.



Airbags




1   Front airbags                                   3   Side airbags
2   Head airbags                                    4   Knee airbag


Front airbags                                       Head airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front     In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in       head.
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.                                    Knee airbag
                                                    The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
Side airbags                                        impact.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.




                                                                                             85
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Safety


Protective action                                   ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐      nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end      also applies to steering wheel covers, the
collisions.                                           dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the
                                                      sides of the headliner.◀
     Information on how to ensure the optimal
                                                    Even when all instructions are followed closely,
     protective effect of the airbags
                                                    injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.              ruled out in certain situations.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the            The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
  steering wheel rim, holding your hands at         short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
  the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep    ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
  the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
  low as possible if the airbag is triggered.             In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
                                                          and after triggering of the airbags
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
  jects between an airbag and a person.             Do not touch the individual components imme‐
                                                    diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
                                                    erwise, there is the danger of burns.
  the front passenger side as a storage area.
                                                    Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
                                                    mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
  front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
                                                    your service center or a workshop that has the
  with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
                                                    necessary authorization for handling explosives.
  attach holders such as for navigation instru‐
  ments and mobile phones.                          Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
                                                    tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
                                                    desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
  correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
                                                    could result in injury.◀
  in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
  occur if the front airbag is triggered.           Warnings and information on the airbags are
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or        also found on the sun visors.
  other objects on the front passenger seat
  that are not approved specifically for seats      Automatic deactivation of the front
  with integrated side airbags.                     passenger airbags
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐     The system determines whether the front pas‐
  ets, over the backrests.                          senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
                                                    sistance of the human body.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
  away from the side airbag and do not rest         The front and side airbags on the front passen‐
  against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries      ger side are activated or deactivated accordingly
  can occur if the airbags are triggered.           by the system.

▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.        The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
                                                    mirror shows the current status of the front pas‐
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
                                                    senger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐       Front passenger airbag indicator lamp below.
  bag cover panels, cover them or modify
  them in any way.




    86
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                         Safety     Controls


      Leave feet in the footwell                        Indicator lamp for the front passenger
       Make sure that the front passenger keeps         airbags
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
passenger airbags may not function properly.◀

      Child restraint fixing system in the front
      passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc‐
tions under Children on the front passenger
seat, refer to page 50.◀

                                                        The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
Malfunction of the automatic                            bags indicates the operating state of the front
deactivation system                                     passenger airbags.
When transporting older children and adults, the        The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in           tivated or deactivated.
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
                                                                      ▷ The indicator lamp lights up
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
                                                                        when a child who is properly
up.
                                                                        seated in a child restraint fix‐
In this case, change the sitting position so that                       ing system intended for that
the front passenger airbags are activated and                           purpose is detected on the
the indicator lamp goes out.                                            seat or the seat is empty. The
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have                     airbags on the front passen‐
the person sit in the rear.                                             ger side are not activated.
To make sure that occupation of the seat cush‐          ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
ion can be detected correctly:                            for example, a correctly seated person of
▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion pad‐            sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
  ding, ball mats or other items to the passen‐           airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
  ger seat unless they are specifically recom‐            tivated.
  mended by BMW.                                        The system generally detects children seated in
▷ Do not place any objects on the front pas‐            a child seat, especially in the child seats that
  senger seat.                                          were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
                                                        manufactured. After installing a child seat, make
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
                                                        sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas‐
  could press against the seat from below.
                                                        senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the
                                                        child seat has been detected and the front pas‐
                                                        senger airbags are not activated.




                                                                                                 87
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Safety


Operational readiness of airbag system                Functional requirements
                                                      The system must have been initialized when the
                                                      tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
                                                      reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐
                                                      itialize the system after each correction of the
                                                      tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
                                                      wheel change.

                                                      System limits
                                                            Sudden tire damage
      When the ignition is switched on,, refer              Sudden serious tire damage caused by
      to page 54, the warning lamp comes on           external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
      briefly to indicate that the entire airbag      vance.◀
system and the belt tensioners are operational.
                                                      A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐
                                                      not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla‐
Airbag system malfunction                             tion pressure regularly.
▷ The warning lamp does not light up after the        The system could be delayed or malfunction in
  ignition is switched on.                            the following situations:
▷ Warning lamp remains permanently on.                ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
      Have the airbag system checked without          ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
      delay if there is a malfunction                   surface.
In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐      ▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise,          high lateral acceleration.
there is the risk that the system will not function   ▷ When driving with snow chains.
as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident
occurs.◀                                              Status display
                                                      The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
                                                      be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
FTM Flat Tire Monitor                                 whether or not the FTM is active.
                                                      1. "Vehicle Info"
The concept
                                                      2. "Vehicle status"
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.                           3.      "Flat Tire Monitor"
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing     The status is displayed.
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving.                                         Initialization
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and     The initialization process adopts the set inflation
therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐          tire pressures as reference values for the detec‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and           tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
reported as a flat tire.                              firming the inflation pressures.




     88
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                           Safety       Controls


Do not initialize the system when driving with           Continued driving with a flat tire
snow chains.                                             If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. "Vehicle Info"                                        1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
2. "Vehicle status"                                         vers.
3.      "Reset"                                          2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.                 3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".                   pressure in all four tires.

6. Drive away.                                               If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
                                                             correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
The initialization is completed while driving,
                                                             been initialized. In this case, initialize the
which can be interrupted at any time.
                                                             system.
The initialization automatically continues when
                                                         Possible driving distance with complete loss of
driving resumes.
                                                         tire inflation pressure:

Indication of a flat tire                                The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
                                                         inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
          The warning lamp lights up red. A              and the driving style and conditions.
          message appears on the Control Dis‐
                                                         For a vehicle containing an average load, the
          play. In addition, a signal sounds.
                                                         possible driving distance is ap‐
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation   prox. 50 miles/80 km.
pressure.                                                When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid             its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.                   duced lane stability during braking, a longer
                                                         braking distance, and altered self-steering
      Do not continue driving without run-flat           properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
      tires                                              ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not            ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving          Because the possible driving distance depends
may result in serious accidents.◀                        on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐          actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.              pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
                                                         external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Actions in the event of a flat tire                            Continued driving with a flat tire
                                                              Drive moderately and do not exceed a
Run-flat tires
                                                         speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed                                            A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
                                                         change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
                                                         duced lane stability during braking, a longer
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
                                                         braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
                                                         erties.◀




                                                                                                       89
                         Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls        Safety


      Final tire failure                               Status display
      Vibrations or loud noises while driving can      1. "Vehicle Info"
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed   2. "Vehicle status"
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
                                                       3.     "TPM"
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀       The status is displayed.

                                                       Status indicator on the Control Display
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM                              The tire and system status is indicated by the
                                                       color of the tires.
The concept                                            A change in the tire inflation pressure during
The tire inflation pressure is measured in the         driving is taken into account.
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if         A correction is only necessary if this is indicated
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or      by the TPM
more tires.
                                                       Wheels, green
Functional requirements                                The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target
The system must have been reset while the in‐          state.
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.               One wheel is yellow
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐          A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
sure that the system will operate properly.            the indicated tire.
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or        All wheels are yellow
wheel change.                                          ▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
                                                         in several tires.
System limits                                          ▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
      Sudden tire damage                                 change and thus issues a warning based on
                                                         the inflation pressures initialized last.
      Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐         ▷ A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys‐
vance.◀                                                  tem is being reset.

The system does not operate correctly if it has        Wheels, gray
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
                                                       The system cannot detect a flat tire.
indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
sures.                                                 Reasons for this may be:
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat      ▷ TPM is being reset.
tire:                                                  ▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
▷ For a mounted wheel without TPM electron‐              same radio frequency.
  ics.                                                 ▷ Malfunction.
▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
  tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
  quency.



     90
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                         Safety       Controls


Resetting the system                                         Do not continue driving without run-flat
Reset the system after each correction of the                tires
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or        Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
wheel change.                                          equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
                                                       may result in serious accidents.◀
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"                                    When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
                                                       Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐
3.      "Reset"
                                                       essary.
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".              Actions in the event of a flat tire
6. Drive away.
                                                       Run-flat tires
     The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
     TPM..." is displayed.                             Maximum speed
After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐   You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐      speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
setting process is completed automatically as
you drive. The tires are shown in green and            Continued driving with a flat tire
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
                                                       If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the process resumes auto‐            1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
matically.                                                vers.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is re‐     2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis‐     3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is              next opportunity.
shown.
                                                           If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
                                                           correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
Low tire pressure message                                  have been reset. Reset the system.
          The small warning lamp lights up yel‐        Possible driving distance with complete loss of
          low and the large warning lamp lights        tire inflation pressure:
          up red. A message appears on the
                                                       The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
          Control Display. In addition, a signal
                                                       inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
sounds.
                                                       and the driving style and conditions.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
                                                       For a vehicle containing an average load, the
  flation pressure.
                                                       possible driving distance is ap‐
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel               prox. 50 miles/80 km.
  change and thus issues warnings based on
                                                       When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
  the inflation pressures initialized last.
                                                       its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid           duced lane stability during braking, a longer
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.                 braking distance, and altered self-steering
                                                       properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
                                                       ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
                                                       ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.



                                                                                                     91
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls        Safety


Because the possible driving distance depends          ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the          have the service center check it if necessary.
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐          ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,           your service center.
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
                                                       ▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys‐
      Continued driving with a flat tire                 tem again.
     Drive moderately and do not exceed a                         The small warning lamp flashes in yel‐
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.                                          low and then lights up continuously;
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a                    the larger warning lamp comes on in
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐                 yellow. On the Control Display, the
duced lane stability during braking, a longer          tires are shown in gray and a message appears.
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐       No flat tire can be detected.
erties.◀
                                                       Display in the following situations:
      Final tire failure                               ▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
      Vibrations or loud noises while driving can        same radio frequency: after leaving the area
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed     of the disturbance, the system automatically
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could            becomes active again.
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀       Declaration according to NHTSA/
                                                       FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Message when the system was not                        Systems
reset                                                  Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
                                                       should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
          The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
                                                       flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
          message appears on the Control Dis‐
                                                       the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
          play.
                                                       or tire inflation pressure label (If your vehicle has
The system detected a wheel change but was             tires of a different size than the size indicated on
not reset.                                             the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
                                                       bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐
Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
                                                       tion pressure for those tires.).
pressure are not reliable.
                                                       As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
                                                       been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system.
                                                       system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
                                                       sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
Malfunction
                                                       significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
           The small warning lamp flashes in yel‐      the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
           low and then lights up continuously;        should stop and check your tires as soon as
           the larger warning lamp comes on in         possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
           yellow. On the Control Display, the         sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
tires are shown in gray and a message appears.         causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
No flat tire can be detected.                          failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
                                                       ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the ve‐
Display in the following situations:                   hicle's handling and stopping ability.



     92
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     Safety     Controls


Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for     ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re‐     brake lamps light up in addition.
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres‐
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi‐
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.



Brake force display
The concept




▷ During normal brake application, the outer
  brake lamps light up.




                                                                                            93
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls     Driving stability control systems



Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment                                    Dynamic Stability Control
This chapter describes all series equipment as       DSC
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also     The concept
describes equipment that may not be found in         DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected       when driving away and accelerating.
special equipment or the country version. This       DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐    tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
tems.                                                to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
                                                     on a steady course by reducing engine speed
                                                     and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.
Antilock Brake System ABS                                  Adjust your driving style to the situation
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐           An appropriate driving style is always the
ing.                                                 responsibility of the driver.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full       The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
brake applications, thus increasing active           with DSC.
safety.
                                                     Do not reduce the additional safety margin with
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐      a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a risk
gine.                                                of an accident.◀

                                                     Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
Electronic brake-force
                                                     When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
distribution                                         duced during acceleration and when driving in
The system controls the brake pressure in the        bends.
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.       To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
                                                     as soon as possible.

Brake assistant                                      Deactivating DSC
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.

                                                              Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
                                                              ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the


     94
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                       Driving stability control systems       Controls


indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru‐    Dynamic Traction Control
ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deacti‐
                                                   DTC
vated together.
                                                   The concept
In the interest of better forward momentum,        The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
brake intervention is performed in the manner of   forward momentum is optimized.
a differential lock when the drive wheels spin     The system ensures maximum forward momen‐
quickly even if DSC is deactivated.                tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
                                                   snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
Activating DSC
                                                   It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
        Press the button.                          ate caution.
        DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the      You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
instrument cluster go out.                         der the following special circumstances:
                                                   ▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
For better control                                   slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road
                                                     surfaces
       The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
       trols the drive forces and brake forces.    ▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off in
                                                     deep snow, sand, or on loose ground
      The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC has failed.                                    ▷ When driving with snow chains.

DSC deactivated:                                   Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
       The indicator lamp lights up and
                                                   Traction Control
       DSC OFF appears in the instrument           Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
       cluster.                                    provides maximum traction on loose ground.
                                                   Driving stability is limited during acceleration
                                                   and when driving in bends.

                                                   Activating DTC




DSC and DTC deactivated.



                                                           Press the button.
                                                           TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
                                                   ment cluster and the indicator lamp for
                                                   DSC OFF lights up.




                                                                                             95
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Controls      Driving stability control systems


Deactivating DTC                                      Hill Descent Control HDC
          Press the button again.
                                                      The concept
         TRACTION and the indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster go out.                        HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
                                                      matically controls vehicle speed on steep down‐
                                                      hill gradients. Without requiring brake applica‐
For better control                                    tion, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
          The indicator lamp flashes: DTC con‐        twice walking speed.
          trols the drive forces and brake forces.    You can activate the Hill Descent Control at
      The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and           speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
DTC has failed.                                       driving downhill at below approx.
                                                      22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces its speed
DTC activated:                                        to approx. twice walking speed and keeps it con‐
          The indicator lamp lights up and TRAC‐      stant.
          TION appears in the instrument cluster.     While you are actively braking, the system is on
                                                      standby. The system does not brake the vehicle
                                                      during this time.

                                                      Increasing or reducing speed
                                                      The speed can be changed in the range from
                                                      roughly twice walking speed to approx.
                                                      15 mph/25 km/h by pressing the accelerator or
                                                      brake pedal lightly.
                                                      A target speed within the same range can be
                                                      specified using the lever of the cruise control.
DTC is activated.



Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
your vehicle. To enhance performance during
sporty driving, the rear wheel on the inside of the
curve is braked while the resulting braking effect
is largely compensated by engine intervention.
                                                      1   Increasing speed
                                                      2   Decreasing speed
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv‐
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to the
front and rear axle depending on the driving sit‐
uation and prevailing road conditions.

     96
                             Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                         Driving stability control systems        Controls


Activating HDC                                       Drive-off assistant
                                                     This system supports driving away on gradients.
                                                     The handbrake is not required.
                                                     1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
                                                     2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐
                                                        out delay.
                                                     Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
                                                     roll back slightly.
                                                           Driving off without delay
        Press the button; the LED above the
        button lights up.                                  After releasing the foot brake, start driving
                                                     without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied          not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐
automatically.                                       prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
                                                     back.◀
Deactivating HDC
        Press the button again; the LED goes
        out. HDC is automatically deactivated        Servotronic
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
                                                     The concept
Using HDC                                            The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
                                                     quired to turn the wheels depending on the
HDC can be used in every driving position.
                                                     speed at which you are driving.
Displays in the instrument cluster                   Power steering provides strong support at low
                                                     speeds, which means that less effort is needed
                                                     to turn the wheels. Power steering support less‐
                                                     ens as your speed increases.

                                                     Malfunction
                                                               The warning lamp lights up.A mes‐
                                                               sage appears on the Control Display.
                                                               Servotronic is malfunctioning or has
                                                     failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐
                                                     sible.
1   Display for target speed
2   HDC display


Malfunction
If the HDC display goes out during HDC opera‐
tion or is not displayed: HDC is not available due
to high brake temperatures or DSC has failed.




                                                                                                97
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Driving comfort



Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment                                   One lever for all functions

This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

                                                    1   Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat‐
Cruise control                                          ing
                                                    2   Storing and maintaining speed or deceler‐
The concept                                             ating
The system is functional at speeds beginning at     3   Deactivating cruise control
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
                                                    4   Resuming a speed stored beforehand
The speed specified using the lever on the
steering column is maintained.
                                                    Maintaining current speed
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.                Push, arrow 1, or pull, arrow 2, the lever to the
                                                    resistance point.
     Do not use cruise control
                                                    The car's current speed is stored and main‐
      Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐     tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant   briefly in the instrument cluster.
speed, for instance:
                                                    On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
▷ On curvy roads.                                   maintain the set speed if current engine power
▷ In heavy traffic.                                 output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on    is insufficient on downhill slopes, the system will
  a loose road surface.                             brake the vehicle slightly.

Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
                                                    Increasing desired speed
and cause an accident.◀
                                                    Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
                                                    point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed
                                                    is reached.
                                                    ▷ Each time the lever is pressed to the point of
                                                      resistance, the desired speed increases by
                                                      approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
                                                    ▷ Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
                                                      resistance point, the desired speed is in‐
                                                      creased by up to 5 mph/10 km/h.


    98
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                             Driving comfort       Controls


The system stores and maintains the speed.            Warning lamp
                                                               The warning lamp comes on when
Accelerating using the lever                                   cruise control has been deactivated as
Accelerating slightly:                                         a result of DSC intervention, for exam‐
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,     ple. A message appears on the Control Display.
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly:                           Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the lever beyond the resistance point, ar‐      Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored speed
row 1, until the desired speed is reached.            is resumed and maintained.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the       In the following cases, the stored speed value is
accelerator pedal. The system stores and main‐        deleted and cannot be called up again:
tains the speed.                                      ▷ When driving stability control systems inter‐
                                                        vene.
Decreasing speed
                                                      ▷ When selector lever position N is engaged
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point       or transmission position D is disengaged.
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.                                            ▷ When the ignition is switched off.

▷ Each time the lever is pulled to the resist‐
                                                      Displays in the instrument cluster
  ance point, the desired speed is decreased
  by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled beyond the re‐
  sistance point, the desired speed is reduced
  by up to 5 mph/10 km/h until the minimum
  speed of 20 mph/30 km/h is achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.

Deactivating cruise control
Push the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.         1   Stored speed
The displays in the speedometer go out.               2   Selected speed is displayed briefly
In addition, the system is automatically deacti‐
vated when:                                           If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears briefly,
                                                      conditions may not be adequate to operate the
▷ The brakes are applied.
                                                      system.
▷ Selector lever position N is engaged or
                                                      Call up Check Control messages, refer to
  transmission position D is disengaged.
                                                      page 78.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
  vated.                                              Malfunction
▷ When DSC or ABS is intervening.
                                                                The warning lamp lights up. The sys‐
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing                 tem is malfunctioning or has failed.
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
                                                               A message appears on the Control
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
                                                      Display. More information, refer to page 77.
again and maintained.



                                                                                                 99
                         Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls     Driving comfort



Park Distance Control PDC                            Limits of ultrasonic measurement
                                                     The detection of objects can reach the physical
The concept                                          limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance:
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the    ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
backup camera, refer to page 102, can be             ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
switched on.
                                                     ▷ With low objects.
PDC supports you when parking. A slow ap‐
                                                     ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
proach to an object in front of or behind your ve‐
hicle is announced by:                               Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
                                                     move into the blind area of the sensors before or
▷ Signal tones.
                                                     after a continuous tone sounds.
▷ Visual display.
                                                     High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
                                                     be detected.
Measurement
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors          False warnings
in the bumpers.
                                                     PDC may issue a warning under the following
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.                       conditions even though there is no obstacle
An acoustic warning is first given:                  within the detection range:
▷ By the front sensors and two rear corner           ▷ In heavy rain.
  sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.                    ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.                ice.
  5 ft/1.50 m.                                       ▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
                                                     ▷ On rough road surfaces.
System limits
                                                     ▷ In large buildings with right angles and
      Check the traffic situation as well
                                                       smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
       PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
                                                     ▷ In heavy exhaust.
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐   ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident         sweeping machines, high pressure steam
could result from road users or objects located        cleaners or neon lights.
outside of the PDC detection range.
                                                     Switching on automatically
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal        With the engine running or the ignition switched
tone.◀                                               on, shift the selector lever into position R.

      Avoid driving quickly with PDC                 Switching off automatically when
      Avoid approaching an object quickly.           driving forward
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet      The system switches off when a certain distance
active.                                              or speed is exceeded.

For technical reasons, the system may other‐         Switch on the system again if necessary.
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀




   100
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                           Driving comfort       Controls


Switching on/off manually                            Volume
                                                     You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
                                                     refer to page 161.
                                                     The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
                                                     rently in use.

                                                     Visual warning
                                                     The approach to an object can be shown on the
                                                     Control Display. Objects that are farther away
                                                     are displayed on the Control Display before a
        Press the button.                            signal tone sounds.


▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
object. For example, if an object is detected to
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker.                          The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
                                                     vated.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
the shorter the intervals.                           If the last image selected was the rear view cam‐
If the distance to a detected object is less than    era, this is displayed again. To switch to PDC:
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is                "Switch off rear view camera"
sounded.
                                                     The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
If objects are located both in front of and behind   rently in use.
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded.                                             Image on the Control Display
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:                                           Switching on the rear view camera
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that    using iDrive
  is detected by only one of the corner sen‐         With PDC activated:
  sors.                                                  "Rear view camera"
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.                      The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The signal tone is switched off:                     The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐            rently in use.
  ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.




                                                                                              101
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Driving comfort


Malfunction                                            Switching on automatically
                                                       With the engine running or the ignition switched
                                                       on, shift the selector lever into position R.
                                                       The image of the rear view camera is displayed
                                                       when the system has been switched on using
                                                       iDrive.

                                                       Switching off automatically when
                                                       driving forward
                                                       The system switches off when a certain distance
A Check Control message, refer to page 77, is          or speed is exceeded.
displayed in the instrument cluster.                   Switch on the system again if necessary.
The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap‐
pear in shaded form on the Control Display. PDC
                                                       Switching on/off manually
has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
  spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
  tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.



Rear view camera                                                Press the button.

The concept                                                     ▷ On: the LED lights up.

The rear view camera assists you when parking          ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
and maneuvering in reverse. To accomplish this,        If PDC is displayed, switch on the backup cam‐
the region behind your vehicle is shown on the         era via the iDrive, refer to page 101.
Control Display.
                                                       Assistance functions
System limits
                                                       Functional requirement
      Check the traffic situation as well
                                                       ▷ Rear view camera is switched on.
      Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident       ▷ Tailgate is completely closed.
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀

      Detection of objects
     High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀




   102
                              Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                            Driving comfort       Controls


Pathway lines                                         Parking using pathway and turning
                                                      lines
                                                      1. Position the vehicle so that the turning lines
                                                         lead into the margins of the parking space.




▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear
  view camera when the transmission is in re‐
  verse.
▷ Help estimate the required amount of space          2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
  when parking and maneuvering on a flat road            the pathway line covers the corresponding
  surface.                                               turning circle line.
▷ Depend on the current steering angle and
  are continuously adapted to movements of
  the steering wheel.

Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to
page 104.

Turning lines



                                                      Obstacle marking




▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear
  view camera.
▷ Show the path of the smallest turning circle
  on a flat road surface.                             ▷ Three-dimensionally shaped markings can
▷ When the steering wheel is turned, only one           be displayed in the image of the rear view
  turning line is displayed.                            camera.

Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to   Their color gradation corresponds to the mark‐
page 104.                                             ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance to
                                                      the object pictured.



                                                                                               103
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Controls       Driving comfort


Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive, refer        Camera
to page 104.

Activating assistance functions
Several assistance functions can be active at the
same time.

Showing the parking aid lines
     "Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning lines are displayed.
                                                       The lens of the rear view camera is under the
Showing the obstacle marking                           grasping lip of the tailgate.
     "Obstacle marking"
                                                       The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis‐           Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
played.

Image on the Control Display

Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
     "Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.

Brightness
With the rear view camera switched on:

1.       Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
   is reached and press the controller.

Contrast
With the rear view camera switched on:
1.       Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
   is reached and press the controller.




     104
                              Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                    Climate       Controls



Climate
Vehicle equipment                                    describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                     your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as       special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment       also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also     tems.



Automatic climate control




1   Manual air distribution                          9   Temperature, right
2   Maximum cooling                                  10 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
3   Temperature, left                                   sation

4   AUTO program                                     11 Switching cooling function on/off manually

5   Manual air flow rate, AUTO intensity             12 Rear window defroster

6   Display                                          13 Seat heating, right  45

7   Automatic recirculated air control/recircu‐      14 Interior temperature sensor, please keep
    lated air mode                                      clear

8   ALL program                                      15 Seat heating, left  45




                                                                                              105
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Climate


Comfortable interior climate                        Maximum cooling
For almost all conditions, the AUTO program 4               Press the button.
offers the optimum air distribution and air flow
                                                            The system is set to the lowest tem‐
rate, refer to AUTO program below. Select a
                                                    perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-
comfortable interior temperature only.
                                                    air mode.
The following sections contain more detailed in‐
formation on the available setting options.         Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
Most of these settings are stored for the remote    gion. Open them for this purpose.
control currently in use, Personal Profile set‐     Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
tings, refer to page 31.                            ▷ At an external temperature of approx.
                                                      32 ℉/0 ℃.
Manual air distribution                             ▷ When the engine is running.
Press the buttons repeatedly to select a pro‐
gram:                                               AUTO program
▷           Windows.                                        Press the button.
                                                            Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐
▷           Upper body region.
                                                    perature are controlled automatically.

▷           Footwell.                               Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
                                                    intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
The programs can be combined as necessary.          rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
                                                    body, and into the footwell.
Temperature                                         The cooling function is switched on automati‐
                                                    cally with the AUTO program.
              Turn the wheel to set the desired
              temperature.                          At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
                                                    trols the program in such a way that window
              The automatic climate control
                                                    condensation is prevented as much as possible.
              achieves this temperature as
              quickly as possible, if necessary     To switch off the program: press the button
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,       again or manually adjust the air distribution.
and then keeps it constant.
                                                    Intensity of the AUTO program
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐      With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
perature settings. The automatic climate control    control of the air volume and air distribution can
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set     be adjusted.
temperature.
                                                            Press the left or right side of the button:
Maximum heating power can be obtained with
                                                            decrease or increase the intensity.
the highest setting, regardless of the external
temperature.                                        The selected intensity is shown on the display
At the lowest setting, cooling is continuous, re‐   of the automatic climate control.
gardless of the external temperature.
                                                    Air volume, manual
                                                    To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
                                                    switch off the AUTO program first.


    106
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                      Climate      Controls


        Press the left or right side of the button:   ALL program
        decrease or increase air volume.
                                                               Press the button.
The selected air volume is shown on the display                 The current temperature setting for the
of the automatic climate control.                     driver's side is transferred to the front passenger
The air volume of the automatic climate control       side.
may be reduced automatically to save battery
                                                      If the temperature setting is changed on the
power.
                                                      driver's side, the temperature on the front pas‐
                                                      senger side changes as well.
Automatic recirculated air mode/
recirculated air mode                                 The program is switched off if the setting is
                                                      changed on the front passenger side or the but‐
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
                                                      ton is pressed again.
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
                                                      Defrosting and defogging windows
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.                                                   Press the button.
        Press the button repeatedly to select                 Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
        an operating mode:                            moved from the windshield and the front side
                                                      windows.
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
                                                      For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
                                                      function.
  trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
  side air and controls the shutoff automati‐
                                                      Cooling function
  cally.
                                                      The passenger compartment can only be
▷ Right LED on, recirculated air mode: the
                                                      cooled with the engine running.
  supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
  manently blocked.                                            Press the button.
    If the windows are fogged over, switch off               The air is cooled and dehumidified and
    the recirculated-air mode and press the           – depending on the temperature setting –
    AUTO button to utilize the condensation           warmed again.
    sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the
    windshield.                                       Depending on the weather, the windshield may
                                                      fog up briefly when the engine is started.
      Continuous recirculated-air mode
                                                      The cooling function is switched on automati‐
      The recirculated air mode should not be         cally with the AUTO program.
used for an extended period of time, as the air
                                                      When using the automatic climate control, con‐
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
                                                      densation water, refer to page 128, develops
                                                      that exits underneath the vehicle.
Via the button on the steering wheel
A button on the steering wheel can be used to         Rear window defroster
quickly switch between recirculated air mode                   Press the button.
and the previous setting.
                                                             The rear window defroster switches off
                                                      automatically after a certain period of time.




                                                                                                 107
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Climate


Switching the system on/off                            Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
                                                       The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐
Switching off                                          coming air.
          Press and hold the left button or, with      The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
          the setting at the lowest level, press the   pollutants from the outside air that enters the
left button.                                           vehicle.
All displays are cleared except for the rear win‐      Your service center replaces this combined filter
dow defroster if it is switched on.                    during routine maintenance.

When the automatic climate control is switched
off, the supply of outside air is suspended. If the
air quality deteriorates or the window fogs over,
                                                       Parked-car ventilation
switch the system back on and increase the air
                                                       The concept
flow rate.
                                                       The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
Switching on                                           passenger compartment to lower interior tem‐
                                                       peratures.
Press any button, except for the buttons for the
ALL program or rear window heating.                    The system can be switched on and off at any
                                                       external temperature, either directly or by using
Ventilation                                            a preset switch-on time. It remains switched on
                                                       for 30 minutes.
                                                       Since the system uses a substantial amount of
                                                       electrical current, refrain from activating it twice
                                                       in succession without allowing the battery to be
                                                       recharged in normal operation between use.
                                                       Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
                                                       They can be operated via iDrive.

                                                       Switching on/off directly
1   Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and           1. "Settings"
    close the air vents                                2. "Climate"
2   Use the lever to change the direction of the       3. "Activate parked-car vent."
    air flow


Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your direction,
e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.

Draft-free ventilation
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

                                                           The symbol on the automatic climate control
                                                       flashes if the system is switched on.



    108
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                   Climate   Controls


Preselecting activation times
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"




5. Set the desired time.
    The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
    The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.




                                                                                        109
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Controls     Interior equipment



Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment                                     system being operated, the system is generally
                                                      compatible with the Universal Garage Door
This chapter describes all series equipment as        Opener.
well as country-specific and special equipment
                                                      If you have any questions, please contact:
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in          ▷ Your service center.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected        ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
special equipment or the country version. This        HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐     Controls, Inc.
tems.
                                                      Controls on the interior rearview mirror

Universal Garage Door
Opener
The concept
The Universal Garage Door Opener can be used
to operate up to 3 functions in remote-control‐
led systems, such as garage door drives or light‐
ing systems. The Universal Garage Door Opener
replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmit‐
                                                      1   LED
ters. To operate it, the buttons on the interior
rearview mirror must be programmed for the de‐        2   Buttons
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for        3   Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐
the system is needed for the programming pro‐             gramming.
cedure.
     During programming                               Programming
       During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the Universal Garage Door          General information
Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐         1. Switch on the ignition.
mals, or objects in the range of movement of the      2. Initial setup:
remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a
                                                          Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐
risk of injury or damage.
                                                          rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-          prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐
held transmitter.◀                                        rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored             programmed settings of the buttons on the
functions for security reasons.                           interior rearview mirror are deleted.
                                                      3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐
Compatibility                                            tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1
         If this symbol is printed on the packaging      to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on
         or in the operating instructions of the         the interior rearview mirror. The required


   110
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                          Interior equipment        Controls


    distance depends on the particular hand-           Synchronization:
    held transmitter.
                                                       1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
4. Press the button of the desired function on            controlled system.
   the hand-held transmitter and the button
                                                       2. Program the corresponding button on the
   being programmed on the interior rearview
                                                          interior rearview mirror as described.
   mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED on
   the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at      3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐
   first.                                                 ton on the system being set up. You have
                                                          approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, release
   both buttons. Rapid flashing indicates that         4. Press and hold the button on the interior
   the button on the interior rearview mirror has         rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and
   been programmed.                                       then release it. Repeat this step up to three
                                                          times if necessary to complete the synchro‐
    If the LED does not flash faster after 60 sec‐
                                                          nization procedure. When synchronization
    onds, change the distance between the in‐
                                                          is completed, the programmed function is
    terior rearview mirror and the hand-held
                                                          executed.
    transmitter and repeat the step. Multiple tri‐
    als at different distances may be necessary.
    Wait at least 15 seconds between trials.
                                                       Reprogramming individual buttons
                                                       1. Switch on the ignition.
6. To program additional functions on other
   buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.                       2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance
                                                          of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the
The systems can be operated with the buttons
                                                          memory buttons.
on the interior rearview mirror.
                                                          The required distance depends on the par‐
Special characteristics of alternating-                   ticular hand-held transmitter.
code radio systems                                     3. Press the memory button of the Universal
If the system cannot be operated after repeated           Garage Door Opener.
programming, check whether the system to be            4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
operated uses an alternating-code system.                 20 seconds, press the transmit button on
Read the operating instructions of the system or          the hand-held transmitter.
press and hold the programmed button on the            5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the interior      rapidly.
rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first and then         If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
lights up continuously for 2 seconds, the system          60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
is equipped with an alternating-code system.              the step.
This flashing LED pattern repeats itself for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds.                                         Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af‐
                                                          ter approx. 60 seconds, change the distance
In systems with an alternating-code system, the           and repeat the step. If programming was
Universal Garage Door Opener and the system               aborted by the hand-held transmitter, hold
must be additionally synchronized.                        down the memory button and press and re‐
Please obtain additional information on syn‐              lease the button on the hand-held transmit‐
chronization in the operating instructions of the         ter several times for 2 seconds.
system being set up.
The systems will be easier to synchronize with
the aid of a second person.


                                                                                                111
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls        Interior equipment


Controls                                             The display shows you the main or secondary
                                                     compass direction in which you are driving.
      Prior to operation
      Before operating a unit with the Universal     Operating concept
Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no
                                                     Various functions can be called up by pressing
people, animals, or objects in the range of move‐
                                                     the adjustment button with a pointed object
ment of the system; otherwise, there is a risk of
                                                     such as a pen. The following adjustment options
injury or damage.
                                                     are displayed one after the other, depending on
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-     how long the adjustment button is pressed:
held transmitter.◀
                                                     ▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.
The system, such as the garage door, can be          ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
                                                     ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.
view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐
tion switched on. When you are within the re‐        ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand
ception range of the system, press and hold the        steering.
button until the function is initiated. The LED on   ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.
the interior rearview mirror lights up continu‐
ously while the radio signal is being transmitted.   Setting compass zones
                                                     Set the compass zone corresponding to the ve‐
Deleting stored functions                            hicle's geographic location so that the compass
Press the right and left buttons on the interior     can function correctly; refer to the world map
rearview mirror simultaneously for approx.           with compass zones.
20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All
stored functions are deleted. The functions can‐
not be deleted individually.



Digital compass




1   Adjustment button
2   Display




    112
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                      Interior equipment       Controls




Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds.       2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
The number of the compass zone set is shown        3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐
in the display.                                       onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full
To change the zone setting, briefly press the         circle at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h.
adjustment button repeatedly until the display        When the system is calibrated, the C is re‐
shows the number of the compass zone corre‐           placed by the compass directions.
sponding to the current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.     Right-hand/left-hand steering
10 seconds.                                        The digital compass is set for right-hand or left-
                                                   hand steering at the factory.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the      Setting the language
following situations:                              Press the adjustment button for 12‑13 seconds.
▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown.         Briefly press the adjustment button again to
                                                   switch between English "E" and German "O".
▷ The cardinal direction displayed does not
  change even if the direction of travel           The setting is automatically saved after approx.
  changes.                                         10 seconds.
▷ Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐
   jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity
   of the vehicle and that there is enough space
   to drive in a circle.



                                                                                             113
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Interior equipment



Ashtray/cigarette lighter                           Sockets
                                                    The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
Opening                                             electrical equipment while the engine is running
                                                    or when the ignition is switched on. The total
                                                    load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at
                                                    12 volt.
                                                    Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
                                                    insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

                                                    Front center console



Pull cover 2 up.


Emptying
Take out the insert.

Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched    Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
on, press in the cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
                                                    Rear center console
back out.
     Danger of burns
     Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀


                                                    Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Connecting electrical devices
                                                    In storage compartment under center
Note                                                armrest
     Do not connect the charger to the socket       To access the socket: remove the cover.
      Do not connect the battery charger to the
socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as
this could damage the battery.◀




   114
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                        Interior equipment         Controls


In cargo area                                        Front cover
                                                     1. Push the cover up and out of the brackets on
                                                        both sides at the rear, arrow.




Fold open the cover.

                                                     2. Pull the cover back, lifting it up and out of the
Cargo area                                              side brackets.


Cargo covers                                         Enlarging the cargo area
      Do not place objects on the covers             General information
     Do not place objects on the covers. If you      The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu‐       the rear seat backrests.
pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or
                                                     The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
damage the covers.◀
                                                     40-20-40.
To load bulky luggage, the covers can be re‐         The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different
moved.                                               positions between the comfort and transport
                                                     positions and they can be folded down.
Rear cover
                                                     In the comfort position, the backrests are tilted
1. Detach the securing straps from the tailgate.     back to the greatest possible angle and in the
2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it     transport position they are nearly vertical.
   back and out of the brackets, arrows 2.           Before mounting a child restraint fixing system,
                                                     note the instructions, refer to page 50.
                                                           Danger of pinching
                                                            Before folding down the rear seat back‐
                                                     rests, ensure that path of movement of the back‐
                                                     rests is clear. Especially when the middle sec‐
                                                     tion is folded down, ensure that no one is located
                                                     in or reaches into the path of movement of the
                                                     rear seat backrests. Otherwise, injuries or dam‐
                                                     age may result.◀




                                                                                                115
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Interior equipment


      Observe the instructions concerning the         Folding the backrests back up
      safety belt                                     When the backrests are folded back up, they
Observe the instructions concerning the safety        engage in the transport position.
belt, refer to page 45. Otherwise, personal pro‐      To set the desired backrest tilt or comfort posi‐
tection may be compromised.◀                          tion, pull the lever of the left/right backrest or the
                                                      loop of the center backrest forward.
Outside backrests                                           Locking the backrest
                                                            Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
                                                      engage the seat backrests, locking them in
                                                      place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐
                                                      cident due to unexpected seat movement.◀

                                                      Partition net
                                                            Firmly attach the partition net
                                                            Make sure that the partition net is firmly
1. Reach into the recess and pull the lever to‐       attached; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
   ward the front.
                                                      The partition net can be attached behind the
2. Engage the backrest in the desired position        front or rear seats.
   or fold it down.
On the left side, the outer and center backrests      Before installing
are adjusted jointly toward the front if both back‐   1. Remove the pouch with the partition net
rests are engaged in the same lock-in position.          from the storage compartment under the
The backrests can be adjusted separately to‐             cargo floor panel in the cargo area.
ward the rear. Note that the center backrest can‐     2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un‐
not be tilted farther down than the left backrest.       roll it, and unfold it.
                                                          After use, fold and roll up the partition net in
Center backrest only                                      the same manner and place it in the pouch
                                                          so that it can be stowed back under the
                                                          cargo floor panel.
                                                          Ensure that hooks and tensioning buckles
                                                          do not rest on the rod elements.
                                                      3. Unfold the partition net to the point where
                                                         the rod elements engage.

                                                      Mounting eyes
                                                      Four mounting eyes are located on the back of
1. Pull the loop, arrow.
                                                      the rear seat backrests.
2. Engage the backrest in the desired position
   or fold it down.




   116
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                        Interior equipment        Controls


                                                     4. Attach the hooks 1 at the bottom of the re‐
                                                        taining straps into the eyelets on the rear
                                                        seat backrest, arrow, on both sides.




▷ Installation behind the front seats, arrows 1.
▷ Installation behind the rear seats, arrows 2.


Label                                                5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,
                                                        tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐
Ensure that the partition net is correctly posi‐
                                                        sioning buckles.
tioned, i.e., do not reverse front and back.
The partition net is labeled accordingly.            Installation behind the front seats

Installation behind the rear seats
1. If necessary, tilt the rear seat backrests for‐
   ward and remove the front cargo cover, refer
   to page 115.
2. Fold open the cover caps 1 of the rear brack‐
   ets in the headliner to the point where they
   engage.
3. Insert the rods of the partition net 2 all the
   way into the holders on both sides and slide      1. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
   forward.                                             Enlarging the cargo area.
                                                     2. Fold open the cover caps of the front brack‐
                                                        ets in the headliner to the point where they
                                                        engage.
                                                     3. Insert the rods of the partition net all the way
                                                        into the holders on both sides and slide for‐
                                                        ward.
                                                     4. Attach the hooks at the bottom of the re‐
                                                        taining straps into the upper eyelets on the
                                                        rear seat backrest on both sides.
                                                     5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,
                                                        tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐
                                                        sioning buckles.




                                                                                                117
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Interior equipment


Removing                                              ward, pressing it into the gap between the cargo
To remove and stow the partition net, proceed         area floor and the rear seat backrest.
in reverse order.
                                                            Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor
To fold up, press both release buttons, arrows.             panel when it is upright.
                                                      Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor panel
                                                      when it is upright, do not press up or down on it,
                                                      and do not adjust the rear seat backrests; oth‐
                                                      erwise, damage may result.◀

                                                      Before closing the tailgate, fold down the cargo
                                                      floor panel. To do this, pull the cargo floor panel
                                                      toward the rear, raising it up and out of the gap.
                                                      The cargo floor panel can be removed if neces‐
                                                      sary.
Cargo floor panel
                                                      Lashing eyes
Compartment in floor                                  To secure pieces of luggage with nets or draw
      Note the maximum permissible load               straps, lashing eyes are available in the cargo
                                                      area, refer to page 131.
      Do not exceed a maximum load of
55 lbs/25 kg in the storage compartment be‐
                                                      Multi-function hooks
neath the cargo floor panel; otherwise, damage
may result.◀

To access the tool kit, for example, lift the stor‐
age compartment at the rear.
To lift, reach into the recess on the rear edge of
the storage compartment.
The storage compartment can be removed if
necessary.

Raising the cargo floor panel                         Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags and
                                                      totes, for example, are located on the left and
                                                      right sides of the cargo cover support, arrow.

                                                            Do not hang heavy items from the hooks
                                                            Only hang light bags or suitable objects
                                                      from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of
                                                      objects flying about during braking and evasive
                                                      maneuvers.
                                                      Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has
Reach under the cargo floor panel on the left,        been appropriately secured.◀
right and at the rear. Fold the panel up and for‐




   118
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                      Interior equipment    Controls



Ski and snowboard bag
General information
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.




                                                                                       119
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Controls      Storage compartments



Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment                                   The light in the glove compartment switches on.

This chapter describes all series equipment as           Close the glove compartment again im‐
well as country-specific and special equipment           mediately
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                    Close the glove compartment immediately after
describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                    use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
                                                    during accidents.◀
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.                                               Closing
                                                    Fold up the cover.

Notes                                               USB interface for data transfer
     No loose objects in the passenger com‐
     partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐
partment without securing them; otherwise,
they may present a danger to occupants for in‐
stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐
vers.◀

     No non-slip mats on the dashboard
     Do not use non-slip materials, such as         Port for importing and exporting data, such as
non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be     music collections, refer to page 176, on USB
damaged by the substances in the materials.◀        devices.

                                                    Observe the following when connecting:
                                                    ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
Glove compartment                                     nector into the USB interface.

Opening                                             ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
                                                      lamps to the USB interface.
                                                    ▷ Do not connect a USB hard drive.
                                                    ▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
                                                      external devices.



                                                    Center armrest front
                                                    Storage compartment
Pull the handle.                                    The center armrest between the front seats
                                                    contains a compartment with cupholders or the


   120
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                  Storage compartments        Controls


cover for the snap-in adapter, depending on the    When folding up, push the center armrest firmly
version.                                           back into the rear seat backrest.
Details on this mobile phone cradle, refer to
page 202.
                                                   Connection for an external
Opening                                            audio device
                                                   This can be used to connect an external audio
                                                   device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
                                                   ▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 181.
                                                   ▷ USB audio interface, refer to page 182.



                                                   Storage compartments
                                                   Storage compartments
Pull the center armrest upward.
                                                   Interior
Adjusting                                          ▷ Glove compartment, refer to page 120.
                                                   ▷ Compartments in the center console.
                                                   ▷ Compartments in the doors.
                                                   ▷ Bottle holders in the doors, cupholders, re‐
                                                     fer to page 122.

                                                   Cargo area
                                                   ▷ Lashing eyes, refer to page 131.
                                                   ▷ Storage compartment under the cargo floor
Slide the center armrest into the desired posi‐      panel, refer to page 118.
tion.                                              ▷ Left and right storage compartments.
                                                   ▷ Multi-function hook, refer to page 118.

Center armrest                                     Storage compartment package
                                                   For your comfort:

                                                   Interior
                                                   ▷ Insertable cupholder, refer to page 122.
                                                   ▷ Front center armrest, refer to page 120.
                                                   ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
                                                   ▷ Retaining straps in the front door compart‐
                                                     ments.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.      ▷ Rear center armrest with integrated cu‐
                                                     pholders.


                                                                                          121
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Controls      Storage compartments


Cargo area                                                  Unsuitable containers
▷ Retaining strap on the left side panel for se‐             Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
  curing small items.                                  ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
▷ Retaining straps on the cargo area floor.            age.◀

▷ Insertable partition elements for the storage
  compartment under the cargo floor panel,             Front
  used to variably subdivide the storage com‐          ▷ In the front door compartments as a bottle
  partment.                                              holder for 1-quart/1 liter bottles, for exam‐
    With partition net: arrange the partition ele‐       ple.
    ments in such a way that there is enough              Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with
    space at the rear of the storage compart‐             the bottom slanted toward the front.
    ment for the partition net.                        ▷ In the center console.
▷ Storage net next to the storage compart‐
  ment on the right in the cargo area.                 Insertable cupholder.
                                                       The insertable cupholder is located in the com‐
                                                       partment below the center armrest.
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located at the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
      Do not obstruct view
      When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision.◀

      No heavy objects
      Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;        Insert the cupholder in the holder on the center
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐           console.
sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀                                                 Rear
                                                       ▷ In the front door compartments as a bottle
                                                         holder for 25-ounce/0.75 liter bottles, for ex‐
Cupholders                                               ample.
                                                          Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with
Notes                                                     the bottom slanted toward the front.
      Shatter-proof containers and no hot              ▷ In the center armrest.
      drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀




   122
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                    Storage compartments    Controls




Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after the
other.




                                                                                       123
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                               Driving tips
                         This section provides you with information useful
                             in dealing with specific driving and operating
                                                                conditions.




Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
        Driving tips      Things to remember when driving



Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment                                       Drive conservatively for the first
                                                        200 miles/300 km.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment          Brake system
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                        Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                        prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
                                                        contact and wear patterns between brake pads
special equipment or the country version. This
                                                        and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
                                                        period.
tems.
                                                        Following part replacement
                                                        The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
Breaking-in period
                                                        served if any of the components mentioned
                                                        above have to be renewed in the course of the
General information
                                                        vehicle's operating life.
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a          General driving notes
long vehicle life and good economy.
                                                        Closing tailgate
Engine and differential
                                                              Drive with the tailgate closed
Always obey all official speed limits.
                                                              Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km                              wise, passengers and other road users may be
                                                        endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if an
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
                                                        accident occurs or during braking or evasive
speeds:
                                                        maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
▷ For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and                  ter the passenger compartment.◀
  100 mph/160 km/h.
                                                        If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
                                                        the tailgate open:
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.                                                  ▷ Drive moderately.
                                                        ▷ Close all windows and the panoramic glass
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km                                 sunroof.
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be           ▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
increased.
                                                        Hot exhaust system
Tires                                                         Hot exhaust system
Due to technical factors associated with their
                                                             High temperatures are generated in the
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
                                                        exhaust system.
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.


   126
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                        Things to remember when driving            Driving tips


Do not remove the heat shields installed and          Driving through water
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure           Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass,   than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no
etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust      faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
system during driving, while in idle position
mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead               Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal         tions
injury as well as property damage.                    Do not exceed this water depth and walking
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there      speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐
is the danger of getting burned.◀                     trical systems and the transmission may be
                                                      damaged.◀

Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle                                               Braking safely
                                                      Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
      Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
                                                      feature.
      hicle
                                                      Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
It is not recommended to use mobile phones,
                                                      way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
such as mobile phones without a direct connec‐
                                                      sary.
tion to an external aerial in the vehicle's passen‐
ger compartment. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐         The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
tronics and mobile communication devices can          You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no   of steering effort.
assurance that the radiation generated during         Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle      the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
interior.◀                                            active mode.
                                                            Do not let your foot rest on the brake pedal
Hydroplaning
                                                           Do not drive with your foot resting on the
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can          brake pedal. Even light but consistent pedal
form between the tires and road surface.              pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐          wear and possibly even brake failure.◀
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road        Objects in the area around the pedals
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.                                No objects in the area around the pedals
                                                           Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
      Hydroplaning
                                                      objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
     When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐         otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀             impeded while driving
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire        Do not place additional floor mats over existing
tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,           mats or other objects.
refer to page 234.                                    Only use floor mats that have been approved for
                                                      the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.




                                                                                                 127
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Driving tips     Things to remember when driving


Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened     ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
again when they are returned after being re‐           used at all.
moved, such as for cleaning.◀                        ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
                                                     Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
Driving in wet conditions                            that must be exerted by the pads during brake
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly   applications to clean the discs is not reached.
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every       Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
few miles.                                           brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
Ensure that this action does not endanger other      fect that generally cannot be corrected.
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the     Condensation under the parked vehicle
brake discs and pads.                                When using the automatic climate control, con‐
In this way braking efficiency will be available     densation water develops that exits underneath
when you need it.                                    the vehicle.
                                                     Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
Hills                                                vehicle are normal.
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise,
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a        Driving on poor roads
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
                                                     BMW X1 combines an all-wheel drive system
You can increase the engine's braking effect by      with the advantages of a normal passenger car.
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
                                                           Do not drive on unpaved terrain
necessary.
                                                           Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other‐
Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic
                                                     wise the vehicle may be damaged.◀
transmission, refer to page 63.
        Avoid load on the brakes                     For your own safety and the safety of passen‐
                                                     gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following
      Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
                                                     points:
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐       ▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
sibly even brake failure.◀                             driving; never take risks.
                                                     ▷ Adjust speeds according to road conditions.
        Do not drive in neutral                        The steeper and rougher the road surface is,
      Do not drive in neutral or with the engine       the lower the speed should be.
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In     ▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhill
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable     grades: the engine oil and coolant should be
with the engine stopped.◀                              filled nearly to the MAX mark.
                                                     ▷ Use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to
Brake disc corrosion                                   page 96, on steep downhill grades.
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination       ▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obstacles
on the brake pads are furthered by:                    and drive around these where possible.
▷ Low mileage.




   128
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                      Things to remember when driving       Driving tips


▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact
  between the vehicle body and the ground.
  The maximum ground clearance is 8 in‐
  ches/20 cm and may vary with the loaded
  cargo.
▷ When driving through water, do not exceed
  the maximum water height of 12 in‐
  ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.
▷ After driving through water, press on the
  brake pedal several times at low speeds to
  dry the brakes.
▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, activate
  Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
  page 95, briefly.
▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to enable
  the driving stability control systems to dis‐
  tribute the drive force to the individual
  wheels.

After driving on poor roads
Adhere to the following points to ensure vehicle
safety:
▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt
  and mud from the vehicle body.
▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels
  and tires and check for damage.




                                                                                       129
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
       Driving tips     Loading



Loading
Vehicle equipment                                           YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
                                                            hicle and unstable driving situations may
This chapter describes all series equipment as              result.
well as country-specific and special equipment
                                                     2. Determine the combined weight of the
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                        driver and passengers that will be riding in
describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                        your vehicle.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This       3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐       and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
tems.                                                   pounds.
                                                     4. The resulting figure equals the available
                                                        amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
General information                                     For example, if the YYY amount equals
      Overloading the vehicle                           1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐
                                                        sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
       To avoid exceeding the approved carrying         able cargo and luggage load capacity is
capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.      400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐        5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss      and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
of tire inflation pressure.◀                            weight may not safely exceed the available
                                                        cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
      No fluids in the cargo area                       in Step 4.
     Make sure that fluids do not leak into the      6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐          from your trailer will be transfered to your
aged.◀                                                  vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting
                                                        a trailer to determine how this may reduce
                                                        the available cargo and luggage load ca‐
                                                        pacity of your vehicle.
Determining the load limit

                                                     Load




1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
   hicle’s placard:
    ▷ The combined weight of occupants and           The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
      cargo should never exceed XXX kg or            the occupants and the cargo.

   130
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                  Loading      Driving tips


The greater the weight of the occupants, the       Securing cargo
less cargo that can be transported.
                                                   Lashing eyes in the cargo area

Stowing cargo




                                                   Securing cargo
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not      ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
  occupied, secure each of the outer safety          taining straps, a cargo net or draw straps.
  belts in the opposite buckle.                    ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low        straps.
  as possible, ideally directly behind the back‐       Cargo straps can be attached to two lashing
  rests.                                               eyes on the cargo area side panel, arrows 1,
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.                       and two lashing eyes on the cargo area rear
                                                       panel, arrows 2.
▷ Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge
  of the backrests.                                      Securing cargo
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to         Stow and secure the cargo as described
  stow cargo.                                      above; otherwise it may present a danger to the
                                                   occupants, for instance during braking and
▷ Use the partition net, refer to page 116, to
                                                   avoidance maneuvers.
  protect passengers. Make sure that objects
  cannot penetrate the partition net.              Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the
                                                   passenger compartment without securing
▷ Place protective material around any sharp-
                                                   them; otherwise, they may present a danger to
  edged or pointed objects that could bump
                                                   occupants, for instance during braking and
  against the rear window while the vehicle is
                                                   avoidance maneuvers.
  in motion.
                                                   Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
                                                   weight or either of the approved axle loads, as
                                                   excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and
                                                   may also place you in violation of traffic safety
                                                   laws.
                                                   Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the
                                                   heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo
                                                   using the upper top tether, refer to page 51,
                                                   mounting points; otherwise, these may become
                                                   damaged.◀




                                                                                            131
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
        Driving tips     Loading



Roof-mounted luggage rack                            Rear luggage rack
Notes                                                Notes
A special rack system is available as an optional    A special rear rack is available as an optional ac‐
accessory.                                           cessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.
                                                     Follow the installation instructions for the rear
Anchorage points                                     rack.
The anchorage points are located on the roof
railing.                                             Anchorage points

Attachment
Follow the installation instructions for the roof-
mounted luggage rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the panoramic glass sun‐
roof.

Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of     The anchorage points are under the covers in
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on     the bumper. Remove the covers, refer to
vehicle handling and steering response.              page 258.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
  and the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not be too large in area.
▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
  tom.
▷ Fasten the roof-mounted luggage securely,
  for instance using lashing straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
  path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
  and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
  tly.




   132
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                Saving fuel      Driving tips



Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment                                   Closing the windows and
This chapter describes all series equipment as      panoramic glass sunroof
well as country-specific and special equipment      Driving with the panoramic glass sunroof and
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also    windows open results in increased air resistance
describes equipment that may not be found in        and raises fuel consumption.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
                                                    Check the tire inflation
tems.
                                                    pressure regularly
                                                    Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
General information                                 pressure, refer to page 228, at least twice a
                                                    month and before starting on a long trip.
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐         Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sions.                                              sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
                                                    tire wear.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐       Drive away without delay
ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
page 243, can have an influence on fuel con‐        Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
sumption and on the environmental impact.           vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
                                                    away, but at moderate engine speeds.
                                                    This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
Remove unnecessary cargo                            reach its operating temperature.

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

                                                    Look well ahead when driving
Remove attached parts                               Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
following use                                       By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
                                                    driving ahead of you.
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear
luggage racks after use.                            Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
                                                    fuel consumption.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

                                                    Avoid high engine speeds
                                                    Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel con‐
                                                    sumption and minimizes wear.




                                                                                               133
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
        Driving tips     Saving fuel



Use coasting conditions                                Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
                                                       not actually needed.
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐     Have maintenance carried out
celerator and let the vehicle roll.
                                                       Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.        optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
                                                       Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
                                                       ice center.
Switch off the engine during                           Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
longer stops                                           tem, refer to page 243.
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.                                            ECO PRO
Fuel savings are already achieved after the en‐
gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.         The concept
                                                       ECO PRO supports the driver in achieving high
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function                   fuel economy. Engine control and comfort func‐
                                                       tions, such as the climate control system, are
The Automatic Start/Stop Function of your ve‐
                                                       adjusted accordingly.
hicle automatically switches off the engine dur‐
ing a stop. Additional information on the Auto‐        In addition, situation-related information can be
matic Engine Start/Stop Function, refer to             displayed that helps the driver achieve lower fuel
page 56.                                               consumption.
If the engine is stopped and then started again,       The resulting range extension can be displayed
fuel consumption and emissions drop com‐               in the instrument cluster.
pared to an engine that runs permanently. Stop‐
ping the engine even for just a few seconds can        Activating ECO PRO
result in savings.                                             Press the button; the LED above the
Use of this system can cause premature wear on                 button lights up.
certain vehicle components.                            ECO PRO appears in the instrument cluster and
In addition, fuel consumption depends on other         DSC is activated if necessary.
factors as well, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance, and environmental fac‐
tors.



Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.



   134
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                Saving fuel     Driving tips


Displays in the instrument cluster                   ECO PRO tip
                                                     Situation-related tips that indicate measures to
                                                     achieve optimum fuel economy can be dis‐
                                                     played.
                                                     A reminder is displayed when the ECO PRO
                                                     speed of 80 mph/130 km/h is exceeded.

                                                     Displaying the ECO PRO tip
                                                     1. "Vehicle Info"
                                                     2. "ECO PRO Tips"
After activation, ECO PRO and the bonus range
are displayed in the instrument cluster.             ECO PRO climate control
                                                     Climate control is adjusted for optimum fuel
ECO PRO bonus range                                  economy.
The vehicle's cruising range can be extended by      To achieve better fuel economy, the actual tem‐
adjusting your driving style.                        perature may vary slightly from the set temper‐
This extended range can be displayed as a bo‐        ature and the passenger compartment may be
nus range in the instrument cluster.                 heated or cooled more slowly.
The bonus range is indicated in the range dis‐
play.                                                Deactivating ECO PRO
The bonus range is automatically reset after re‐             Press the button again.
fueling.                                                    The LED above the button and the ECO
                                                     PRO display in the instrument cluster go out.
Driving style
ECO PRO displays the efficiency of the current
driving style in the instrument cluster.
▷ ECO PRO not highlighted: efficient driving
  style.
▷ ECO PRO highlighted: adjust your driving
  style, for example by accelerating less
  quickly.
To drive efficiently:
▷ Accelerate less quickly.
▷ Brake in advance.
▷ Reduce speed to the ECO PRO speed of
  80 mph/130 km/h.
▷ Automatic transmission: shift from S to D, or
  avoid shifting manually.




                                                                                             135
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                 Navigation
                           This chapter contains various examples of how
                           the navigation system can guide you reliably to
                                                         your destination.




Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Navigation     Navigation system



Navigation system
Vehicle equipment                                     2. Open "Options".
                                                      3. "Navigation system version"
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment            Information is displayed on the data version.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in          Updating the navigation data
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This        General information
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐     Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can
tems.                                                 be updated.
                                                      Current navigation data and the authorization
                                                      code are available from your service center.
General information                                   ▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
The navigation system can determine the pre‐            date may take several hours.
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐    ▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
                                                      ▷ During the update, only the basic functions
guide you to every entered destination.
                                                        of the navigation system are available.
      Entries in stationary vehicle                   ▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
       Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐       ▷ After the updating process is complete, the
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable     system restarts.
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
                                                      ▷ Remove the medium with the navigation
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
                                                        data after the update.
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
                                                      Performing an update
and other road users in danger.◀                      1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
                                                         player with the labeled side facing up.
Opening the navigation system                         2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
                                                         play.
1.          Press the button on the controller.       3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
2. "Navigation"                                          tion DVD.
                                                      4. Change the DVD if necessary.
       The navigation system can also be called
       up directly using the button on the con‐       After the trip is interrupted, follow the instruc‐
troller.                                              tions on the Control Display.

                                                      Viewing the status
                                                      1. Open "Options".
Navigation data
                                                      2. "Navigation update"
Information on navigation data
1. "Navigation"


     138
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                      Navigation system     Navigation


Removing navigation DVD

1.        Press button 1.
     The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.




2. Remove the DVD.




                                                                                         139
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Navigation      Destination entry



Destination entry
Vehicle equipment                                     in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
                                                      and other road users in danger.◀
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in          Manual destination entry
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This        General information
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐     The system supports you in entering street
tems.                                                 names and house numbers by automatically
                                                      completing the entry and providing entry com‐
                                                      parisons, refer to page 24.
At a glance                                           Stored town/city and street names can be called
                                                      up quickly.
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:                                ▷ If the existing entries should not be changed,
                                                        the entries for the state/province and town/
▷ Enter the destination manually, see below.
                                                        city can be skipped.
▷ Select the destination from the address
                                                      ▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/
  book, refer to page 142.
                                                        city center if no street is entered.
▷ Last destinations, refer to page 143.
▷ Special destinations, refer to page 143.            Entering a state/province
▷ Destination entry via map, refer to
  page 145.                                           1.       Press the button.
▷ Using the home address as the destination,          2. "Navigation"
  refer to page 143.                                  3. "Enter address"
▷ Destination entry by voice, refer to
  page 146.
▷ Enter the destination via BMW Assist, refer
  to page 145.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 23.
      Entries in stationary vehicle
       Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐       4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable      state/province.
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you




   140
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                        Destination entry       Navigation


Entering a town/city                                2. Highlight the street.
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐       3. Select the street.
   played town/city.
                                                    Alternative: enter the street address
                                                    and house number
                                                    1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
                                                    2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
                                                    3. "House number"
                                                    4. Select the numbers.
                                                    5. Change to the list of house numbers.
                                                    6. Select a house number or range of house
2. Select letters, if necessary.                       numbers.
     The list is narrowed down further with each
                                                    Street does not exist in the destination
     entry.
                                                    city/town
3. Move the controller to the right.
                                                    The desired street does not exist in the specified
4. Select the name of the town/city from the        city/town because it belongs to another part of
   list.                                            the city/town.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
                                                    1. "Navigation"
name:
                                                    2. "Enter address"
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
                                                    3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Highlight the town/city.
                                                    4. Change to the list of street names.
3. Select the town/city.
                                                    5. Select "In" with the state/province currently
                                                       displayed.
Entering the postal code
                                                        All streets of the selected state/province are
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
                                                        offered. The associated town/city is dis‐
   played town/city.
                                                        played after the street name.
2.       Select the symbol.
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
   cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.

Entering a street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
                                                    6. Select the letters.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
   way as you would enter a town/city.              7. Change to the list of street names.
If there are several streets with the same name:    8. Highlight the street.
                                                    9. Select the street.
1. Change to the list of street names.


                                                                                              141
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Navigation      Destination entry


Starting destination guidance after                    Storing the destination in the address
entering the destination                               book
1. "Accept destination"                                After entering the destination, store the desti‐
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another                 nation in the address book.
   destination"                                        1. "Navigation"
    Add, refer to page 147, a destination as a         2. "Map"
    further destination.
                                                       3.     "Guidance"
                                                       4. Open "Options".
Address book                                           5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
                                                          contact"
Create contacts, refer to page 213.

Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
    Contacts with addresses are displayed if
    these addresses have been checked as des‐
    tinations in the contacts.
    If the contacts with addresses from the mo‐        6. Select an existing contact, if available.
    bile phone are not displayed, they first need
                                                       7. "Business address" or "Home address"
    to be checked as destinations, refer to
    page 214.                                          8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
                                                          name".
                                                       9. "Store in vehicle"

                                                       Storing the position
                                                       The current position can be stored in the ad‐
                                                       dress book.

                                                       1. "Navigation"
                                                       2. Open "Options".
                                                       3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with
                                                          to contact"
   "A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"




   142
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                         Destination entry        Navigation


4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐         2. "Last destinations"
   isting contact from the list. Select the type
   of address and enter the first and last name.
5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"              Starting destination guidance
                                                     1. "Navigation"
Using the home address as the
                                                     2. "Last destinations"
destination
                                                     3. Select the destination.
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 206.                     4. "Start guidance"

1. "Navigation"                                      Editing the destination
2. "Address book"                                    1. "Navigation"
3. "Home"                                            2. "Last destinations"
                                                     3. Highlight the destination.
                                                     4. Open "Options".
                                                     5. "Edit destination"

                                                     Deleting the last destinations
                                                     1. "Navigation"
                                                     2. "Last destinations"
                                                     3. Highlight the destination.
4. "Start guidance"                                  4. Open "Options".
                                                     5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
                                                        destinations"
Last destinations
At a glance
                                                     Special destinations
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically.                                       General information
These destinations can be called up and used         Even with the latest navigation data, information
as a destination for destination guidance.           on specific special destinations may have
                                                     changed; for example, gas stations might not be
Calling up the last destination                      in operation.
1. "Navigation"



                                                                                               143
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Navigation     Destination entry


Opening the search for special                           "Start search": if a search term is not entered,
destinations                                             the search is repeated with the previous search
Selection of special destinations, such as hotels        term.
or tourist attractions.
                                                         Category search
1. "Navigation"
                                                         1. "Category search"
2. "Points of Interest"
                                                         2. "Town/City"
3. Select the search function.
                                                         3. Select or enter the town/city.

Online Search                                            4. "Category"

1. "Google™ Local Search"                                5. Select the category.

2. Select a special destination.                         6. "Category details"

3.       Select the symbol.                                   For some special destinations, multiple cat‐
                                                              egory details can be selected. Move the
4. "Start guidance"
                                                              controller to the left to leave the category
                                                              details.
A-Z search
                                                         7. "Start search"
1. "A-Z search"
                                                              A list of the special destinations is displayed.
2. "Town/City"
                                                         8. Select a special destination.
3. Select or enter the town/city.
                                                              Details are displayed.
4. "Category"
                                                              If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
5. Select the category.
                                                              through the pages.
6. "Category details"
                                                              If a phone number is available, a connection
      For some special destinations, multiple cat‐            can be established if necessary.
      egory details can be selected. Move the
                                                         9.      Select the symbol.
      controller to the left to leave the category
      details.                                           10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
                                                             destination"
7. "Keyword"
                                                              Add a destination as a further destination,
8. Enter the keyword.
                                                              refer to page 147.
      A list of the special destinations is displayed.
9. Select a special destination.                         Display of special destinations
      Details are displayed.                             List of special destinations: special destinations
      If multiple details are stored, you can leaf       are arranged by distance and appear with a di‐
      through the pages.                                 rectional arrow pointing to the special destina‐
                                                         tion.
      If a phone number is available, a connection
      can be established if necessary.                   In the splitscreen, special destinations of the se‐
                                                         lected category are displayed in the map view as
10.      Select the symbol.                              symbols. The display depends on the scale of
11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another                  the map and the category.
    destination"
      Add a destination as a further destination,
      refer to page 147.


      144
                               Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                         Destination entry       Navigation


Destination entry via BMW Assist                         ▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
A connection is established to the Concierge               controller in the required direction and
service, refer to page 216.                                turn it.

1. "Navigation"                                      Specifying the street
2. "Enter address"                                   If the system does not recognize the street, one
3. Open "Options".                                   of the following pieces of information is dis‐
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"                          played:
                                                     ▷ A street name in the vicinity.
Displaying special destinations in the               ▷ The county.
map                                                  ▷ The coordinates of the destination.
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view:                                     Additional functions
1. "Navigation"                                      Additional functions are available on the inter‐
2. "Map"                                             active map after the controller is pressed.

3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.



Destination entry by map
Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation"                                      ▷      Select the symbol.
2. "Map"                                                 "Start guidance" or "Add as another
     The current position of the vehicle is dis‐         destination"
     played on the map.                                  Add a destination as a further destination,
3.      "Interactive map"                                refer to page 147.
                                                     ▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
                                                       view.
                                                     ▷ "View in northern direction" or "View in
                                                       driving direction"
                                                     ▷ "Display destination": the map section
                                                       around the destination is displayed.
                                                     ▷ "Display current location": the map section
                                                       around your current location is displayed.
                                                     ▷ "Find points of interest": the search for spe‐
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
                                                       cial destinations is started.
     ▷ To change the scale: turn the controller.
     ▷ To shift the map: move the controller in
       the required direction.


                                                                                              145
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Navigation    Destination entry



Destination entry by voice                           Entering a town/city separately
                                                     The town/city can be said as a complete word.
General information                                  With the destination entry menu displayed:
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐
  fer to page 25.                                    1.            Press the button on the steering
▷ When making a destination entry by voice,               wheel.
  you can change between voice operation             2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹
  and iDrive.
                                                     3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
▷ To have the available spoken instructions             town/city.
  read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
                                                     4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
                                                        least the first three letters.
Saying the entries
▷ The town/city, street, and house number                 Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐
  can be entered using a single command.                  ies may be suggested.

▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐      5. Select a location:
  tersections can be said as whole words or               ▷ Select a recommended town/city: ›Yes‹.
  spelled in the language of the system, refer            ▷ Select a different town/city: ›New entry‹.
  to page 74.
                                                          ▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹, for instance,
     Example: to enter a destination in a US state          entry 2.
     as a whole word, the system language must
                                                          ▷ Spell an entry: ›Spell city‹.
     be English.
                                                     6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and
                                                        the system.
  the language of the system differ.
                                                     If there are several towns/cities with the same
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
                                                     name:
  gerating the pronunciation and inserting
  lengthy pauses between the letters.                Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a
                                                     list and displayed as one location followed by an
▷ The methods of entry depend on the navi‐
                                                     ellipsis.
  gation data in use and the country and lan‐
  guage settings.                                    1. Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹, e. g., En‐
                                                        try 2.
Entering the address in a command                    2. Select the desired town/city.

1.            Press the button on the steering       Entering a street or intersection
     wheel.                                          separately
2. ›Enter address‹                                   Enter a street and intersection in the same way
3. Wait for a request from the system.               as you would enter a town/city.
4. Say the address in the suggested order.
                                                     Entering a house number separately
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
   the system.                                       Depending on the data in the navigation system,
                                                     house numbers up to number 2,000 can be en‐
     If necessary, individually name the separate
                                                     tered.
     components of the address, e.g., the town/
     city.                                           1. ›House number‹


     146
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                         Destination entry        Navigation


2. Say the house number.                                 The intermediate destination is entered in
     Say each digit separately.                          the destination list and is highlighted.

3. Continue making the entry as prompted by         5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
   the system.                                         destination is located at the desired location
                                                       in the list.
Starting destination guidance                       6. Press the controller.
›Start guidance‹
                                                    Starting the trip
                                                    1. After all intermediate destinations are en‐
Planning a trip with                                   tered, highlight the first destination.
intermediate destinations                                If the second destination, for example, is
                                                         highlighted when destination guidance is
New trip                                                 started, the first destination is skipped.
A trip can be planned with several intermediate     2. "Start guidance"
destinations.                                                This symbol marks the active leg of the
1. "Navigation"                                          trip.

2. "Map"
                                                    Storing a trip
3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.    Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
4.      "Guidance"                                  necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
5. "Enter new destination"                          store new trips.
6. Select the type of destination entry.            1. Open "Options".
                                                    2. "Store trip"
                                                    3. Enter a name for the trip.
                                                    4. "OK"

                                                    Selecting a stored trip
                                                    1. "Navigation"
                                                    2. "Stored trips"
                                                    3. Select a stored trip.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.              4. "Start guidance"
8. "Start guidance"
                                                    Changing the trip direction
Entering intermediate destinations                  Intermediate destinations are displayed in re‐
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can       verse order in the list.
be entered for a trip.
                                                    1. "Map"
1. "Enter new destination"                          2.      "Guidance"
2. Select the type of destination entry.            3. Open "Options".
3. Enter the intermediate destination.              4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
4. "Add as another destination"


                                                                                                147
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Navigation    Destination entry


Intermediate destination options
1. "Map"
2.      "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
     ▷ "Edit destination"
     ▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
       intermediate destination to another po‐
       sition in the list.
     ▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
     ▷ "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.

Deleting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Highlight the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"

Opening the last trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"




     148
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                     Destination guidance         Navigation



Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment                                    Route criteria
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                     General information
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also     ▷ The route calculated can be influenced by
describes equipment that may not be found in           selecting certain criteria.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected       ▷ The route criteria can be changed when the
special equipment or the country version. This         destination is entered and during destina‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐      tion guidance.
tems.                                                ▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
                                                       and are taken into consideration when plan‐
                                                       ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
Starting destination                                 ▷ The recommended route may differ from the
guidance                                               route you would take based on personal ex‐
                                                       perience.
1. "Navigation"
                                                     ▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐
2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 140.        trol currently in use.
3. "Accept destination"                              ▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
4. "Start guidance"                                    refer to page 155.
The route is shown on the Control Display.
The distance to the destination/intermediate
                                                     Changing the route criteria
destination and the estimated time of arrival are    1. "Navigation"
displayed in the map view.                           2. "Map"
                                                     3.                "Route preference"
                                                     4. Select the criterion:
Terminating destination
                                                          ▷       "Fast route": time-optimized route,
guidance                                                      being a combination of the shortest pos‐
1. "Navigation"                                               sible route and the fastest roads.

2. "Map"                                                  ▷       "ECO PRO route": optimized com‐
                                                              bination of the fastest and shortest
3.     "Guidance"
                                                              route.
4. "Stop guidance"
                                                          ▷       "Short route": short distance, irre‐
                                                              spective of how fast or slow progress will
                                                              be.
Continuing destination                                    ▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐
guidance                                                    native routes are suggested during ac‐
If the destination was not reached during the last          tive destination guidance.
trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"



                                                                                                149
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Navigation      Destination guidance


         The individual suggestions are high‐        ▷ Street name at the next change in direction.
         lighted in color.
                                                     Lane information
                                                     On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
                                                     are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
                                                     ▷ Solid triangle: best lane.
                                                     ▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an‐
                                                       other lane change may be needed shortly.

                                                     Displaying a list of route sections
                                                     When destination guidance is active, a list of the
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if     route sections can be displayed. The driving dis‐
   necessary:                                        tance and traffic bulletins are displayed for each
    ▷ "Avoid highways": highways are                 route section.
      avoided wherever possible.
                                                     1. "Navigation"
    ▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
                                                     2. "Route information"
      wherever possible.
                                                     3. Highlight a route section.
    ▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
      where possible.                                    The route section is displayed on the split
                                                         screen.


Route
                                                     Bypassing a section of the
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
                                                     route
▷ Arrow view.                                        Calculate a new route for a route section.
▷ List of route sections.                            1. "Navigation"
▷ Map view, refer to page 151.                       2. "Route information"
                                                     3. "New route for"
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow: indicates the current direction
  of travel.
▷ Street name of the road currently being
  driven on.
▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in di‐
  rection.
▷ Intersection view.                                 4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo‐
                                                        meters within which you would like to return
▷ Lane information.
                                                        to the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins.
                                                     5. Press the controller.
▷ Distance to the next change in direction.


   150
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                     Destination guidance          Navigation


Resuming the original route                          3.           "Voice instructions"
If the route section should no longer be by‐
passed:                                              Repeating a spoken instruction
                                                     1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation"
                                                     2. "Map"
2. "Route information"
                                                     3.       Highlight the symbol.
3. "New route for:"
                                                     4. Press the controller twice.
4. "Remove blocking"
                                                     Volume of spoken instructions
                                                     Turn the volume knob while giving an instruction
Gas station recommendation                           until the desired volume is set.
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐       The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
tions along the route are displayed if needed.       rently in use.
Even with the latest navigation data, information
on individual special destinations may have          Saving the spoken instructions on the
changed; for example, gas stations might not be      programmable memory buttons
in operation.                                        The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
1. "Navigation"                                      tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
                                                     memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac‐
2. "Route information"
                                                     cess.
3. "Recommended refuel"
     A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station.                          Map view
     The position of the gas station is shown on
     the split screen.
                                                     Selecting the map view
                                                     1. "Navigation"
5. Select the gas station.
                                                     2. "Map"
6.      Select the symbol.
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to         At a glance
   the selected gas station is started.
     "Add as another destination": the gas sta‐
     tion is added to the route.



Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching spoken instructions on/off
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐    1    Function bar
rently in use.
                                                     2    Route section with traffic obstruction
1. "Navigation"                                      3    Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
2. "Map"                                             4    Planned route


                                                                                                 151
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Navigation     Destination guidance



5   Current location                                 Symbol          Function
6   Upper status field                                               Start/end destination guidance.
7   Lower status field
                                                                     Switch spoken instructions on/
                                                                     off.
Lines in the map
                                                                     Change the route criteria.
Streets and routes are displayed in different col‐
ors and styles depending on their classification.                    Search for a special destination.
Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con‐
nections. Country borders are indicated by thin                      Display traffic bulletins.
lines.                                                               Open the interactive map.

Traffic obstructions                                                 Set the map view.
Small triangles along the planned route indicate                     Change the scale.
route sections with traffic obstructions, depend‐
ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian‐
                                                     To change to the function bar, move the con‐
gles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
                                                     troller to the left.
The traffic signs indicate the significance of the
obstruction.                                         Changing the map section
▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the           "Interactive map"
  planned route or direction.
                                                     ▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the
▷ Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not          required direction.
  affect the planned route or direction.
                                                     ▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 153.                  troller in the required direction and turn it.

Planned route                                        Changing the scale
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐     1.      Select the symbol.
ned route is displayed on the map.
                                                     2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Status fields
                                                     Automatically scaled map scale
Show/hide: press the controller.
                                                     In the map view facing north, turn the controller
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐       in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐
  tertainment details.                               played. The entire route between the current lo‐
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐       cation and the destination is displayed on the
  nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,      map.
  time of arrival, and distance to destination.
                                                     Settings for the map view
Function bar                                         The settings are stored for the remote control
The following functions are available in the func‐   currently in use.
tion bar:
                                                     1. "Navigation"
                                                     2. "Map"
                                                     3. Open "Options".


    152
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                    Destination guidance         Navigation


4. "Settings"                                           ▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
5. To set the map view:                             6. To change the scale: select the split screen
▷ "Day/night mode"                                     and turn the controller.

   Select and create the necessary settings
   depending on the light conditions.
                                                    Traffic bulletins
   "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
   setting is disregarded.                          At a glance
▷ "Satellite images"                                ▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
   Depending on availability and resolution,          tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐
   satellite images are displayed at scales of        tion of a traffic information service. Informa‐
   approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to                tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is
   1,000 km.                                          updated continuously.
▷ "Perspective view in 3D"                              Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
   Prominent areas that are contained in the            gation have the capability to display real-
   navigation data are displayed on the map in          time traffic information. If your system has
   3D.                                                  this capability the following additional terms
                                                        and conditions apply:
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
                                                        An End-User shall no longer have the right
   The map is optimized for displaying traffic
                                                        to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
   bulletins, refer to page 154.
                                                        End-User is in material breach of the terms
   Symbols for the special destinations are no          and conditions contained herein.
   longer displayed.
                                                        A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
                                                        Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic
Map view for splitscreen
                                                        Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐
The map view can be selected for the split              cident data and RDS-TMC network through
screen independently from the main screen.              which it is delivered. You may not modify,
1. Open "Options".                                      copy, scan or use any other method to re‐
                                                        produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or
2. "Split screen"
                                                        distribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly          cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend
   until the split screen is selected.                  and hold harmless BMW of North America,
4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale.          LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐
                                                        work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against
5. Select the map view.
                                                        any and all claims, damages, costs or other
   ▷ "Arrow display"                                    expenses that arise directly or indirectly out
   ▷ "Map facing north"                                 of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐
   ▷ "Map direction of travel"                          cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)
                                                        your violation of this directive and/or (c) any
   ▷ "Map view with perspective"
                                                        unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in
   ▷ "Position"                                         connection herewith.
   ▷ "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive‐            B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
     ways are displayed three dimensionally.            mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
                                                        Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
                                                        suppliers make no representations about


                                                                                               153
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Navigation     Destination guidance


   content, traffic and road conditions, route        Switching the reception on/off
   usability, or speed.                               1. "Navigation"
   C. The licensed material is provided to li‐        2. Open "Options".
   censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traffic
                                                      3. "Receive Traffic Info"
   Network, including, but not limited to, any
   and all third party providers of any of the li‐
   censed material, expressly disclaims, to the
                                                      Opening the list of traffic bulletins
   fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties    1. "Navigation"
   or representations with respect to the li‐         2. "Map"
   censed material (including, without limita‐        3.       "Traffic Info"
   tion, that the licensed material will be error-
   free, will operate without interruption or that         First, traffic bulletins for the calculated route
   the traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐        are displayed.
   plied or statutory, including, without limita‐          The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐
   tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐              tance from the current position of the vehi‐
   bility, non-infringement fitness for a                  cle.
   particular purpose, or those arising from a        4. Select a traffic bulletin.
   course of dealing or usage of trade.
                                                               "More information": display additional
   D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or        information.
   BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
                                                      5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
   special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐
                                                         if required.
   dental damages (including, without limita‐
   tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or
                                                      Traffic bulletins on the map
   profits relating to the same) arising from any
   claim relating directly or indirectly to use of    "Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
   the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐   The Control Display changes to a black and
   work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the      white display. This enables a better view of the
   possibility of such damages. These limita‐         traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre‐
   tions apply to all claims, including, without      garded in this setting. Symbols and special des‐
   limitation, claims in contract and tort (such      tinations are not displayed.
   as negligence, product liability and strict li‐
                                                      1. "Navigation"
   ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐
   sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐     2. "Map"
   tial damages, so those particular limitations      3. Open "Options".
   may not apply to you.                              4. "Settings"
▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map      5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
  by symbols.
▷ The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area      Symbols in the map view
  are stored in a list.                               Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
      The symbol in the function bar of the map       cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
   view turns red if there are traffic bulletins      the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
   that affect the calculated route.                  played.




   154
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                      Destination guidance         Navigation


Additional information in the map view                Destination guidance with traffic
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐        bulletins
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the     General information
calculated route.                                     Detour suggestions from the navigation system
▷ Red: traffic congestion                             can be manually accepted when using semi-dy‐
                                                      namic destination guidance. When using dy‐
▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic
                                                      namic destination guidance, they are automati‐
▷ Yellow: heavy traffic                               cally accepted for route guidance.
▷ Green: clear roads
▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road        Semi-dynamic destination guidance
  construction                                        When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
The displayed information depends on the par‐         semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
ticular traffic information service.                  The destination guidance system takes the
                                                      available traffic bulletins into account. A mes‐
Filtering traffic bulletins                           sage is displayed depending on the route, the
You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the     traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
map.                                                  If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic
                                                      obstructions.
1. "Navigation"                                       The upper part of the message shows:
2. "Map"                                              ▷ Symbol of the first traffic obstruction, pos‐
3. Open "Options".                                      sibly with the distance to the beginning of
4. "Traffic Info categories"                            the obstruction.
5. Select the desired category.                       ▷ Total length of the traffic obstructions on the
                                                        route.
                                                      ▷ Time by which the trip is extended due to the
                                                        traffic obstructions.
                                                      The lower part of the message shows:
                                                      ▷ Detour recommendation with the distance
                                                        to the beginning of the detour.
                                                      ▷ Difference between the length of the new
                                                        route compared to the original route.
                                                      ▷ Time gained if the detour is taken compared
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐     to the original route with the traffic obstruc‐
played on the map.                                      tions.
▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route    Both the original route, shown in white, and the
  are always shown.                                   detour are displayed on the split screen.
▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐
  tify you of potentially dangerous situations,       Accepting the detour
  such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐              "Detour"
  den.
                                                      In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
                                                      the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
                                                      tour suggestion.

                                                                                                 155
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Navigation       Destination guidance


Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes‐
sages are called up in the list.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.         "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5.     "Detour"

Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
  structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
  the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
  extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
  lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
  struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
  less of the setting.

Activating dynamic destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"




     156
                             Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                            What to do if...   Navigation



What to do if...
Vehicle equipment                                    ▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
                                                       during route guidance in front of intersec‐
This chapter describes all series equipment as         tions?
well as country-specific and special equipment
                                                        The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                        you have left the recommended route and
describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                        the system requires a few seconds to cal‐
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
                                                        culate a new route suggestion.
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.



What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot be
  displayed?
   The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
   region, is in a poor reception area, or the
   system is currently determining the posi‐
   tion. Reception is usually best when you
   have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information is
  not used for route guidance?
   When city has been input, no downtown can
   be determined. Input any street in the se‐
   lected city and start destination guidance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
  ance?
   The destination data are not contained in the
   navigation data. Select a destination that is
   as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
  lected?
   The stored data do not contain the data of
   the destination. Select a goal that is as close
   as possible to the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
   "Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
   The Control Display changes to a black and
   white display. This enables a better view of
   the traffic bulletins.


                                                                                            157
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                         Entertainment
                          This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
                          receiving radio stations and playing CDs, DVDs,
                                     and tracks from the music collection.




Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
    Entertainment       Tone



Tone
Vehicle equipment                                   3. Select the desired tone settings.

This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

                                                    4. To adjust: turn the controller.
General information                                 5. To store: press the controller.
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
                                                    Equalizer
                                                    Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader                                               Adjusting the equalizer
▷ "Treble": treble adjustment.                      1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"

▷ "Bass": depth adjustment.                         2. "Tone"

▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.        3. "Equalizer"

▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.          4. Select the desired setting.


Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"




                                                    5. To adjust: turn the controller.
                                                    6. To store: press the controller.




   160
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                      Tone     Entertainment



Multi-channel playback,                            Adjusting the volume
surround                                           1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
                                                   2. "Tone"
Choose between stereo and multi-channel play‐
back, surround.                                    3. "Volume settings"
                                                   4. Select the desired volume setting.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"




                                                   5. To adjust: turn the controller.
                                                   6. To store: press the controller.



                                                   Resetting the tone settings
When surround is activated, multi-channel play‐    All tone settings can be reset to the default set‐
back is simulated when a stereo audio track is     ting.
played.
                                                   1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
                                                   2. "Tone"
Volume                                             3. "Reset"
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
  control.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared
  to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
  safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
  tertainment sound output.
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone
  during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers
  during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".




                                                                                             161
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
    Entertainment       Radio



Radio
Vehicle equipment                                   AM/FM station
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                    Selecting a station
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also    1. "Radio"
describes equipment that may not be found in        2. "FM" or "AM"
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected      3. Select the desired station.
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.



Controls



                                                    All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐
                                                    trol currently in use.

                                                    Changing the station
                                                    Turn the controller and press it

1   Volume, on/off                                  or

2   Change wave band                                         Press the button
3   Change entertainment sources
                                                    or
4   Change station/track
                                                    Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
5   Programmable memory buttons
                                                    page 12.

                                                    Storing a station
Sound output                                        1. "Radio"
                                                    2. "FM" or "AM"
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.

Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.



    162
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     Radio      Entertainment


3. Highlight the desired station.                   4. Open "Options".
                                                    5. "Rename to:"
                                                        If necessary, wait for the desired name to be
                                                        displayed.
                                                    The selected station name is added to the list of
                                                    current stations and stored stations.

                                                    RDS
                                                    RDS broadcasts additional information, such as
                                                    the station name, in the FM wave band.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.              Switching the RDS on/off
The stations are stored for the remote control      1. "Radio"
currently in use.                                   2. "FM"
The stations can also be stored on the program‐     3. Open "Options".
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
                                                    4. "RDS"
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.


                                                    The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
                                                    rently in use.

                                                    HD Radio™ reception
                                                    Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
                                                    signals.
                                                    License conditions

To store the station: press the controller for an   HD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐
extended period.                                    cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐
                                                    eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Renaming a station                                  Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐
                                                    uity Digital Corp.
An FM station with changing station names can
be renamed.
                                                    Activating/deactivating digital radio
1. "Radio"                                          reception
2. "FM"                                             1. "Radio"
3. Select the desired station.                      2. "FM" or "AM"


                                                                                             163
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
    Entertainment        Radio


3. Open "Options".                                   Navigation bar overview
4. "HD Radio Reception"
                                                      Symbol        Function
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.                                                      Change the list view.
  This symbol is displayed in the status line
                                                                    Select the category.
when the audio signal is digital.
When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it                  Direct channel entry
may take several seconds for the station to be                      Timeshift
played back in digital quality.
In areas in which the station is not continuously                   Open the My Favorites category/
received in digital mode, the playback switches                     open a favorite.
between analog and digital reception. In this                       Manage the favorites.
case, switch off digital radio reception.
                                                                    Traffic Jump
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information       The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
on the current track, such as the name of the ar‐    also be stored on the programmable memory
tist.                                                buttons, refer to page 23.

1. Select the desired station.                       Managing a subscription
2. Open "Options".                                   To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
3. "Station info"                                    channels, you must have reception. It is usually
                                                     at its best when you have an unobstructed view
Selecting a substation                               of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
  This symbol indicates that a main station also     status line.
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station        Enabling channels
names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.       The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
                                                     all disabled channels.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.                             1. "Radio"
3. Select the substation.                            2. "Satellite radio"
When reception is poor, the substation is muted.     3.     "Category"



Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.




   164
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     Radio      Entertainment


4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐           Via the iDrive
   gory.                                            1. "Radio"
5. Select the desired channel.                      2. "Satellite radio"
   The phone number and an electronic serial        3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
   number, ESN, are displayed.                         gory.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐        4. Select the desired channel.
   nel enabled.




You can unsubscribe from the channels again         Via the button on the radio
via this phone number.
                                                            Press the button.

Unsubscribing from channels                                 The next channel is selected.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"                                Via direct channel entry
3. Open "Options".                                  1. "Radio"

4. "Manage subscription"                            2. "Satellite radio"
                                                    3.     "Set channel"
                                                    4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
                                                       is reached and press the controller.

                                                    Storing a channel
                                                    1. "Radio"
                                                    2. "Satellite radio"
                                                    3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
                                                       sired category.
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
                                                    4. Select the desired channel.
   number, ESN, are displayed.
                                                    5. Press the controller again.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐
   nels.

Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.


                                                                                            165
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
     Entertainment          Radio


6. Press the controller again to confirm the           is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐
   highlighted channel.                                fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.

                                                       Opening the timeshift function
                                                       1. "Radio"
                                                       2. "Satellite radio"
                                                       3.     "Replay - Time shift"




7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
                                                       ▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
Changing the list view                                   position.
The list view changes every time the first symbol      ▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
on the navigation bar is pressed.                        displayed next to the buffer bar.
Information on the channel is displayed.               ▷ For live transmissions "live".
Symbol             Meaning
                                                       Timeshift menu
                   Channel name

                   Artist                              Symbol Function

                                                                 Go to the live broadcast
                   Track
                                                                 Playback/pause
Selecting a category                                             Next track
1. "Radio"
                                                                 Previous track
2. "Satellite radio"
3.      "Category"                                               Fast forward
4. Select the desired category.                                  Reverse

                                                                 Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐
Timeshift
                                                                 tivated
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must   Automatic timeshift
be available.                                          When the function is activated, audio playback
The stored audio track can be played with a de‐        is stopped automatically in the event of:
lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer      ▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
                                                       ▷ Activation of the voice activation system.


     166
                             Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                          Radio     Entertainment


▷ Muting.                                              4. "Add sports information"
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.      "Replay - Time shift"
4.      "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate:
                                                       5. Select the league.
     "Automatic time shift"
                                                       6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Storing favorites
                                                       Opening the favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,     If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
league, and team.                                      lowing message appears for approx. 20 seconds
                                                       "Favorite alert!".
Storing the artist, track, or game                          "Favorites"
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐   Select the symbol while the message is shown.
rently being broadcast. The channel information
must be available.

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
   sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game.                  The displayed favorite is played.
                                                       If there is no message, the system changes to
Storing the league or team                             the My Favorites category. All favorites currently
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites         being broadcast can be selected from a list.
from a selection list.
                                                       Managing the favorites
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"                                   Activating/deactivating the favorites
3.      "Manage favorites"                             Favorites can be activated and deactivated
                                                       globally and individually.

                                                       1. "Satellite radio"
                                                       2.      "Manage favorites"
                                                       3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐
                                                          ites.


                                                                                                 167
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
     Entertainment         Radio


The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐     Automatic update
rently in use.                                        About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
                                                      the channel names and positions. The update
Deleting favorites                                    takes place automatically and may take several
1. "Satellite radio"                                  minutes.
2.         "Manage favorites"
                                                      Notes
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
                                                      ▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐
4. Open "Options".
                                                        uations, such as under certain environmen‐
5. "Delete entry"                                       tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
                                                        radio has no influence on this.
Traffic Jump                                          ▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels or
Traffic and weather information for a selected          underground garages; next to tall buildings;
region is broadcast every few minutes.                  or near trees, mountains or other powerful
                                                        sources of radio interference.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"                                  Stored stations
3. Open "Options".
                                                      General information
4. "Set jump"
                                                      It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐      Calling up a station
rently in use.                                        1. "Radio"
                                                      2. "Presets"
Activating/deactivating the jump
                                                      3. Select the desired station.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"                                  Storing a station
3.         "Jump to:"                                 The station currently selected is stored.
Information for the selected region is broadcast
                                                      1. "Radio"
as soon as it is available.
                                                      2. "Presets"
A new panel opens.
                                                      3. "Store station"
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol Meaning

             Information will be broadcast shortly.

             Information is currently being broad‐
             cast.


Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
                                                      4. Select the desired memory location.


     168
                             Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     Radio   Entertainment


The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"




                                                                                       169
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
    Entertainment       CD/multimedia



CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment                                   CD/DVD
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                    Playback
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                    Loading the CD/DVD player
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected      Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
special equipment or the country version. This      Playback begins automatically.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐   Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
tems.                                               pressed audio files.

                                                    Starting playback
Controls                                            A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or a
                                                    CD is located in the CD changer.

                                                    1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                    2. "CD/DVD"
                                                    3. Select the desired CD or DVD.




1   Volume, on/off
2   Eject CD/DVD
3   CD/DVD drive
4   Change the entertainment source
5   Change station/track
6   Programmable memory buttons                      Symbol            Meaning

                                                                       CD/DVD player

                                                        ...            CD changer
Sound output
Switching on/off                                    Playable formats
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF     ▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
button on the radio.                                  RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
                                                      audio (video part only), DVD video.
Muting                                              ▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA.
When the ignition is switched on or the engine      ▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC,
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the            M4A.
radio.


    170
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                           CD/multimedia         Entertainment


Audio playback                                      2. Select the desired track to begin playback.

Selecting the track using the button
         Press the button for the appropriate di‐
         rection as often as necessary until the
desired track is played back.


Selecting the track using the iDrive

Audio CDs

                                                    Displaying information on the track




Select the desired track to begin playback.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files                If information about a track has been stored, it is
                                                    displayed automatically:
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐        ▷ Interpret.
rectly.                                             ▷ Album track.

1. Select the directory if necessary.               ▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.

   To change to a higher level directory: move      ▷ File name of track.
   the controller to the left.
                                                    Random playback
                                                    1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                    2. "CD/DVD"
                                                    3. Select the desired CD or DVD.




                                                                                               171
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
    Entertainment          CD/multimedia


4. Open "Options".                                   Playback
5. "Random"                                          The video image is displayed on the Control Dis‐
                                                     play up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h; in
                                                     some countries, it is only displayed while the
                                                     handbrake is set or the automatic transmission
                                                     is in position P.

                                                     DVD video
                                                     1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                     2. "CD/DVD"
                                                     3. Select a DVD with video content.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all            4.        "DVD menu"
tracks within the selected directory are played in
random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.

Fast forward/reverse
          Press and hold the button.


                                                     5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
Video playback
                                                     VCD/SVCD
Country codes
                                                     1. "CD/Multimedia"
Only DVDs with the code of the home region can
be played back; also refer to the information on     2. "CD/DVD"
the DVD.                                             3. Select a CD with video content.

Code Region                                          4.      "Select track"
                                                     5. Select the desired track.
1         USA, Canada

2         Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐      Video menu
          rica                                       To open the video menu: turn the controller dur‐
                                                     ing playback.
3         Southeast Asia
                                                     Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
4         Australia, Central and South America,
          New Zealand                                 Symbol         Function

5         Northwest Asia, North Africa                               Open DVD menu

6         China                                                      Starting playback

0         All regions                                                Pause

                                                                     Stop



    172
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                            CD/multimedia       Entertainment



Symbol           Function                            3. "Audio/language"

                 Next chapter

                 Previous chapter

                 Fast forward

                 Reverse


In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐
ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start
playback.                                            4. Select the desired language.

DVD menu                                             Selecting the subtitles
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the     The subtitles that are available depend on the
   video menu.                                       DVD.
2.        "DVD menu"                                 1. Turn the controller during playback.
     The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐      2. Open "Options".
     pends on the contents of the DVD.
                                                     3. "Subtitles"
3. To select menu items: move the controller
                                                     4. Select the desired language or "Do not
   and press it.
                                                        display subtitles".
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.

DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.

Selecting the language
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.                                                 Setting the brightness, contrast and color
1. Turn the controller during playback.              1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".                                   2. Open "Options".
                                                     3. "Display settings"




                                                                                               173
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
     Entertainment          CD/multimedia


4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"                Selecting the camera angle
                                                      The availability of a different camera angle de‐
                                                      pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.

                                                      1. Turn the controller during playback.
                                                      2. Open "Options".
                                                      3. "Additional options"
                                                      4. "Viewing angle"
                                                      5. Select the desired camera angle.

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting      Opening the main menu, back
   is reached and press the controller.               These functions are not contained on every
                                                      DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
Selecting the zoom                                    use.
Display the video image on the entire screen.
                                                      CD changer
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"




                                                      The BMW CD changer for six CDs is located un‐
                                                      der a cover in the side trim on the left side of the
                                                      cargo area.


                                                      Removing the CD magazine
Selecting a track
                                                      To fill or empty the CD magazine, remove it from
DVD video:
                                                      the CD changer:
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
   displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:

1.         "Select track"
                                                      1. Push the cover aside, arrow 1.
2. Select the desired track.
                                                      2. Press the button, arrow 2.

     174
                             Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                           CD/multimedia       Entertainment


    The CD magazine is ejected.                     Notes
Wait at least 2 seconds before sliding the mag‐
azine back in to ensure that the inserted CDs can   CD/DVD player and changer
be read in.                                              Do not remove the cover
                                                           BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
Filling/emptying the CD magazine                    officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
                                                    not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
                                                    severe eye damage can result.◀

                                                    CDs and DVDs
                                                         Use of CDs/DVDs
                                                         ▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
                                                           with labels applied, as these can be‐
                                                           come detached during playback due
                                                           to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
When filling or emptying the CD magazine, only
                                                           able damage to the device.
touch the CDs at the edge; do not touch the re‐
flective scanning surface.                          ▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
                                                      diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
Filling:
                                                      CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;
Insert one CD per compartment with the printed        otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
side up.                                              and no longer eject.
Emptying:                                           ▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.          Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
                                                      longer eject.◀
Inserting the CD magazine
                                                    General malfunctions
                                                    ▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been
                                                      optimized for performance in vehicles. In
                                                      some instances they may be more sensitive
                                                      to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
                                                      would be.
                                                    ▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
                                                      whether it has been inserted correctly.

                                                    Humidity
Push in the CD magazine all the way in the di‐
                                                    High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
rection of the arrow, arrow 1, and close the
                                                    on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
cover, arrow 2.
                                                    temporarily prevent playback.
The CD changer automatically reads in the in‐
serted CDs and is then ready for operation.




                                                                                            175
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
    Entertainment       CD/multimedia


Malfunctions involving individual CDs/             patents granted and registered in the USA and
DVDs                                               worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/    trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following      logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, Inc. All
causes:                                            rights reserved.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-     Music collection
  recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data
  creation or recording processes, or poor         Storing music
  quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
                                                   General information
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
                                                   Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
  a pen intended for this purpose.
                                                   can be stored in the music collection on a hard
                                                   disc in the vehicle and played from there.
Damage
                                                   ▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
                                                     pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
  moisture.
                                                     tion on the album, such as the artist, is
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.                        stored as well.
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures          ▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
  over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct           audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD
  sunlight.                                          or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as
                                                     an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC
CDs/DVDs with copy protection                        formats are stored. Individual tracks and di‐
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐         rectories can be deleted later, Deleting a
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can        track and directory, refer to page 180.
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or            Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
can only be played to a limited extent.                stored but cannot be played back.

MACROVISION                                              Backing up music data
This product contains copyrighted technology             Regularly back up the music data; other‐
that is based on multiple registered US patents    wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision   disc.◀
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use                Music recognition technology and re‐
of this copy protection must be approved by                 lated data are provided by Gracenote®.
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -     Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may     ognition technology and related content deliv‐
only be used for private purposes. Copying of      ery. For more information, please visit
this technology is prohibited.                     www.gracenote.com.
                                                   CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
DTS Digital Surround™
                                                   copyright © 2000-2011 Gracenote. Gracenote
                                                   Software, copyright © 2000-2011 Gracenote.
        Manufactured under license under U.S.
                                                   This product and service may practice one or
Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
                                                   more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other
                                                   #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,


   176
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                             CD/multimedia         Entertainment


#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,                  3. "Storing..."
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Storing from a CD/DVD
1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4.     Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
                                                     4. "Cancel storing"
5. "Store in vehicle"
                                                     The storage process is interrupted and can be
                                                     continued at any time.

                                                     Continuing the storage process
                                                     1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                     2. "CD/DVD"
                                                     3.     Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
                                                     4. "Continue storing"
                                                     Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
The music collection is displayed and the first      ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the       rupted.
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
quence.                                              Album information
Observe the following during the storage proc‐       During storage, information such as the name of
ess:                                                 the artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not        tion is available in the vehicle database or on the
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as          CD.
this will interrupt the storage process. You can     To update the database, contact your service
switch to the other audio sources without inter‐     center.
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
current CD/DVD that have already been stored         Storing from a USB device
can be called up.
                                                     To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
                                                     nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
Interrupting storage
                                                     partment.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                     ▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
2. "CD/DVD"                                            ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
                                                       with a USB interface.
                                                     ▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
                                                       hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
                                                       tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from




                                                                                                 177
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
    Entertainment       CD/multimedia


   the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the     3. "Music search"
   USB audio interface in the center armrest.
▷ File systems: standard file systems for USB
  devices are supported. The FAT 32 format
  is recommended.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
   face in the glove compartment, refer to
   page 120.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
                                                   4. Select the desired category.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"




                                                   5. Select the desired entry.
                                                       ▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 23,
                                                         and input the desired entry.

Playing music                                          ▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
                                                   6. Select other categories if you wish.
Music search                                           The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
All tracks for which additional information has        order.
been stored can be accessed by the music               Not all categories need to be selected. For
search. Tracks without additional information          example, to search for all tracks by a certain
can be called up via the corresponding album,          artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
refer to page 179.                                     by that artist are then displayed.
1. "CD/Multimedia"                                 7. "Start play"
2. "Music collection"                                  The list of tracks is repeated automatically.

                                                   Restarting the music search
                                                   "New search"




   178
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                             CD/multimedia         Entertainment


Music search by voice                                 Albums
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to    All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
page 25.                                              dates.
                                                       Symbol       Format
1.            Press the button on the steering
     wheel.                                                         Audio CD
2. ›Music search‹                                                   Compressed audio files
3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select
   artist‹.
                                                      1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
                                                      2. "Music collection"
5. Select other categories if you wish.
                                                      3. Select the desired album.
To select a track directly: ›Title ...‹
                                                          Depending on the album, the tracks or the
Say the voice command and the name of the                 subdirectories of the album are displayed.
desired track in a single command.                        The first track is played automatically, if pos‐
                                                          sible.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search, or the album that was selected
last.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"


                                                      4. Change directories if needed to select
                                                         tracks.
                                                          To go up a level in the directory: move the
                                                          controller to the left.

                                                      Random playback
                                                      All tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐
                                                      dom order.
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
                                                      1. "CD/Multimedia"
Top 50                                                2. "Music collection"
The 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.




                                                                                                 179
                         Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
    Entertainment       CD/multimedia


3. Open "Options".                                  Deleting an album
4. "Random"                                         An album cannot be deleted while a track from
                                                    that album is being played.

                                                    1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                    2. "Music collection"
                                                    3. Highlight the desired album.
                                                    4. Open "Options".
                                                    5. "Delete album"

                                                    Deleting a track and directory
                                                    A track cannot be deleted while it is being
Managing music                                      played.
                                                    A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
Albums
                                                    that directory is being played.
Renaming an album                                   1. "CD/Multimedia"
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐    2. "Music collection"
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
                                                    3. Highlight the directory or track.
name is not available, it can be changed later if
desired.                                            4. Open "Options".
                                                    5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"                               Free memory capacity
3. Highlight the desired album.                     Display the free memory capacity in the music
4. Open "Options".                                  collection.
5. "Rename album"                                   1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                    2. "Music collection"
                                                    3. Open "Options".
                                                    4. "Free memory"

                                                    Music collection

                                                    Backing up the music collection
                                                    The entire music collection can be stored on a
                                                    USB device. Make sure there is enough free
6. Select the letters individually.                 memory capacity on the USB device.
                                                    Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
                                                    the music collection may take several hours.




   180
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                          CD/multimedia         Entertainment


Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐   Deleting the music collection
ing a long trip.                                   1. "CD/Multimedia"
1. Starting the engine.                            2. "Music collection"
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐        3. Open "Options".
   face in the glove compartment, refer to         4. "Delete music collection"
   page 120.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"                              External devices
5. Open "Options".
                                                   At a glance
6. "Music data import/export"
                                                    Symbol    Meaning

                                                              AUX-IN port

                                                              USB audio interface

                                                              Music interface for smartphones

                                                              Bluetooth audio


                                                   AUX-IN port
7. "Backup music on USB"
                                                   At a glance
                                                   ▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
                                                     player. The sound is output on the vehicle
                                                     loudspeakers.
                                                   ▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
                                                     volume settings on the audio device. The
                                                     tone depends on the quality of the audio
                                                     files.

                                                   Connecting
Storing the music collection in the vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the existing
music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
                                                   The AUX-IN port is in the center console.




                                                                                          181
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
     Entertainment      CD/multimedia


Connect the headphone connector or line-out         Connectors for external devices
connector of the device to the AUX-IN port.         ▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
                                                      iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
Playback                                              ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and         are supported by the USB audio interface.
   select a track on the audio device.              ▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to
2. "CD/Multimedia"                                    page 202, when equipped with the music
3. If necessary, "External devices"                   interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or
                                                      mobile phones.
4.     "AUX front"
                                                       Playback is only possible if no audio device
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
                                                       is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.

Volume                                              Due to the large number of different audio devi‐
                                                    ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
The volume of the sound output is dependent
                                                    that every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
                                                    ble on the vehicle.
edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
it is advisable to adjust the volumes.              Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐
                                                    vices/mobile phones.
Adjusting the volume
                                                    Audio files
1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                    Standard audio files can be played back:
2. If necessary, "External devices"
                                                    ▷ MP3.
3.     "AUX front"
                                                    ▷ WMA.
4. "Volume"
                                                    ▷ WAV (PCM).
                                                    ▷ AAC, M4A.
                                                    ▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.

                                                    File system
                                                    Standard file systems for USB devices are sup‐
                                                    ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.

                                                    Connecting
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
   is set and press the controller.

USB audio interface/music interface for
smartphones

At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive.The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.                 The USB audio interface is in the center console.




     182
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                CD/multimedia          Entertainment


Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB                 3. Select the       or     symbol.
audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB in‐
terface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐
ported by the USB audio interface.

Connection of a USB device via the USB
audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect       The playback starts with the first track.
the USB audio interface and the USB device              The CD cover belonging to the track may appear
against physical damage.                                on the Control Display after several seconds.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
                                                        Track search
After connecting for the first time                     Selection is possible via:
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type    ▷ Playback lists.
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐       ▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time,            available, composer, album, track.
depending on the USB device and the number
                                                        ▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
of tracks.
                                                          composer.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
                                                        Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
via the file directory.
                                                        the Latin alphabet.
Number of tracks
                                                        Starting the track search
Information from up to four USB devices or for
                                                        1. "CD/Multimedia"
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than   2. "External devices"
36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist‐         3. Select the       or     symbol.
ing tracks may be deleted.                              4.      "Search"

Copy protection                                         5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
                                                           "Artist".
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
agement (DRM) cannot be played.                              All entries are displayed in a list.
                                                             ▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
Playback                                                       sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
1. "CD/Multimedia"                                             results are filtered using this letter as the
                                                               first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
2. "External devices"                                          all results that contain that sequence are
                                                               displayed.




                                                                                                    183
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
     Entertainment         CD/multimedia


     ▷ Select the desired entry from the list.           3. Open "Options".
                                                         4. "Random"

                                                         Fast forward/reverse
                                                                  Press and hold the button.


                                                         Video playback

                                                         At a glance
6. Select other categories if you wish.                  Video playback via snap-in adapter is possible.
     Not all categories need to be selected. For         They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is
     example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist   output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
     are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
     All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐      Playback
     played.                                             The video image is displayed on the front Con‐
7. "Start play"                                          trol Display up to a speed of approx.
                                                         2 mph/3 km/h; in some countries, it is only dis‐
Restarting a track search                                played if the handbrake is set or if the automatic
                                                         transmission is in position P.
"New search"
                                                         1. "CD/Multimedia"
Playback lists                                           2. "External devices"
Calling up playback lists.                               3.      Select the symbol.
1. "CD/Multimedia"                                       4.       "Video"
2. "External devices"                                    5. Select the directory if necessary.
3. Select the       or     symbol.                            To go up a level in the directory: move the
4.      "Playlists"                                           controller to the left.
                                                         6. Select the desired video file to begin play‐
Current playback                                            back.
List of tracks currently being played.
                                                         Video menu
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"                                    Symbol Function
3. Select the       or     symbol.                                  Next video file
4.      "Current playback"
                                                                    Previous video file
Random playback                                                     Double-click on an icon to play back
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐                   previous video file.
dom order.
                                                         Notes
1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                         Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
2. "External devices"
                                                         vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐


     184
                             Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                             CD/multimedia        Entertainment


peratures; refer to the audio device operating        ▷ The ignition is switched on.
instructions.                                         ▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to
Depending on the configuration of the audio             page 193, and on the device.
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the   ▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
files may not play back correctly in each case.         device, such as for a connection without
                                                        confirmation or visibility; refer to the device
Information on connection                               operating instructions.
▷ The connected audio device is supplied with         ▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
  a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the            of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐
  device. Therefore, do not additionally con‐           key. It is only required once for pairing.
  nect the device to a socket in the vehicle;
  otherwise, playback may be compromised.             Pairing and connecting
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
                                                           Pairing a device
  nector into the USB interface.
                                                             To avoid becoming distracted and posing
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
                                                      an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
  lamps to the USB audio interface.
                                                      cle's occupants and to other road users, only
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.                     pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐
                                                      1. "CD/Multimedia"
  charge external devices.
                                                      2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
Bluetooth audio                                       3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
                                                      4. "Add new phone"
At a glance
                                                         The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
▷ Music files on external devices such as audio          played.
  devices or mobile phones can be played
  back via Bluetooth.
    Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
    refer to page 194.
▷ Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
  Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
  speakers.
▷ The volume of the sound output is depend‐
  ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the         5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer
  volume on the device.                                  to the device operating instructions: for in‐
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired              stance, search for or connect the Bluetooth
  with the vehicle.                                      device or a new device.
                                                         The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
Requirements                                             on the device display.
▷ The device is suitable. Information at              6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
  www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.                              the device display.
▷ The device is ready for operation.



                                                                                               185
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
    Entertainment        CD/multimedia


    You are prompted by the iDrive or device to        Requirements
    enter the same Bluetooth passkey.                  If necessary, activate the audio connection of
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.                      the desired device from the list of paired devi‐
                                                       ces.

                                                       1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                       2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
                                                       3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
                                                       4. Select the desired device from the list of
                                                          paired devices.
                                                       5. Open "Options".
                                                       6. "Configure phone"
8. Select the desired functions with which the         7. Activate "Audio".
   device is to be connected, for instance
   "Audio".                                            8. "OK"

9. "OK"                                                Connecting the device
                                                       1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                       2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
                                                       3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
                                                       4. Select the desired device from the list of
                                                          paired devices.




If pairing was successful, the device is displayed
as connected.
White symbol      : the device is active as an audio
source.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 187.
                                                       White symbol     : the device is active as an audio
Connecting a specific device                           source.
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.                   Playback
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐            General information
changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue‐
tooth.                                                 ▷ The display of music track information de‐
                                                         pends on the device.
                                                       ▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
                                                         iDrive.




   186
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                            CD/multimedia       Entertainment


▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐           Unpairing a device
  changed via a mobile phone connected via           1. "CD/Multimedia"
  Bluetooth.
                                                     2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
Starting playback                                    3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
1. Connect the device.                               4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
2. "CD/Multimedia"                                   5. Open "Options".
3. "External devices"                                6. "Remove phone from list"
4.    Select the symbol.




                                                     What to do if...
5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec‐
                                                     Information on suitable devices can be found at
   essary.
                                                     www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Playback menu                                        Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 192.
Depending on the particular device, some of the      The device is not supported by the vehicle.
functions may not be available.                      ▷ Perform a software update, refer to
                                                       page 188, if needed.
Symbol Function
                                                     The device could not be paired or connected.
          Next track
                                                     ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
          Fast forward: press and hold the             and the vehicle match? Enter the same
          symbol.                                      passkey on the device and via iDrive.
          Previous music track                       ▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
          Reverse: press and hold the symbol.          the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
                                                     ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
                                                       to the device or vehicle? Delete connections
Disconnecting the audio connection
                                                       with other devices if necessary.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
                                                     ▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"                                does it have only a limited remaining battery
3. Highlight the desired device.                       life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
4. Open "Options".                                     in adapter or via a charging cable.

5. "Configure phone"                                 ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
                                                       ble that only one device can be connected
6. "Audio"
                                                       to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
7. "OK"



                                                                                             187
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
    Entertainment        CD/multimedia


    from the vehicle and pair and connect only         Displaying the current version
    one device.                                        The currently installed software is displayed.
▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the de‐
                                                       1. "Settings"
  vice off and on again.
                                                       2. "Software update"
▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
                                                       3. "Show current version"
Music cannot be played back.
                                                       Select desired version to display additional in‐
▷ Start the program for playing back music
                                                       formation.
  data on the device and select a track on the
  device if necessary.
                                                       Updating software via USB
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.
                                                       The software may only be updated when the ve‐
Music files can only be played back softly.            hicle is stationary.
▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device.
                                                       1. Store the file for the software-update in the
Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed            main director of a USB flash drive.
or by other messages on the device.
                                                       2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB audio
▷ Switch off the button tones and other signal            interface in the center console. An update
  tones on the device.                                    via the USB interface in the glove compart‐
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or            ment is not possible.
traffic bulletin and is not resumed automatically.     3. "Settings"
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.                   4. "Software update"
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is        5. "Update software"
connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also
connected via the USB interface or the snap-in
adapter.
▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for
  example, disconnect the audio connection,
  refer to page 187, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.

                                                       6. "Start update"
Software Update
                                                       7. "OK"
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version. With        All listed software updates are installed.
a software update, the vehicle can support new
mobile phones or new external device, for ex‐          Restoring the previous version
ample.                                                 The software version prior to the last software
▷ USB.                                                 update can be restored.
    Software updates and related current infor‐        The previous version can only be restored when
    mation is available at www.bmw.com/up‐             the vehicle is stationary.
    date.                                              1. "Settings"
                                                       2. "Software update"


   188
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                          CD/multimedia     Entertainment


3. "Restore previous version"
4. "OK" Double-click.
All listed software updates are removed.

Note
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restored, BMW Assist, Of‐
fice functions, and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again.




                                                                                      189
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                     Communication
                              All of the options available to you for mobile
                            communication with family, friends, business
                          partners, and service providers are described in
                                                                this chapter.




Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication         Telephone



Telephone
Vehicle equipment                                   Snap-in adapter
                                                    The snap-in adapter is used to:
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment      ▷ Hold the mobile phone.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also    ▷ Recharge the battery.
describes equipment that may not be found in        ▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected        tenna of the vehicle.
special equipment or the country version. This
                                                       This provides for better network reception
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
                                                       and consistent sound quality.
tems.

                                                    Approved mobile phones
At a glance                                         Details on which mobile phones and external
                                                    devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
The concept                                         ported by the mobile phone preparation pack‐
                                                    age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue‐
Mobile phones or other external devices such as
                                                    tooth.
audio players can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
                                                    Displaying the vehicle identification
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐       number and software part number
tooth® SIG, Inc.
                                                    The vehicle identification number and software
After these devices are paired once, they are       part number are needed to determine which mo‐
recognized automatically when the ignition is       bile phones are supported by the mobile phone
switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle      preparation package. The software version of
and can then be operated via iDrive, the buttons    the mobile phone may also be required.
on the steering wheel, and via voice activation.
                                                    1. "Telephone"
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone      2. Open "Options".
or as an audio source. The telephone functions      3. "Bluetooth® info"
are described in the following. Operating the au‐   4. "Display system information"
dio functions, refer to page 185.
                                                    These approved mobile phones with a certain
Up to four external devices can be paired.          software version, support the vehicle functions
Certain functions may need to be enabled by the     described below.
mobile phone provider or service provider.          Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
     Using the mobile phone while driving           phones or software versions.
      Make entries only when traffic and road       Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone      to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
in your hand while you are driving; use the         this may lead to a malfunction.
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐        A software update, refer to page 188, can be
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐     performed if necessary.
hicle occupants and other road users.◀



   192
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                 Telephone       Communication


Notes                                                2. Open "Options".
At high temperatures, the charging function of       3. "Bluetooth®"
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.



Pairing/unpairing the mobile
phone
General information                                  Additional functions
The following functions are available:
                                                     Activating/deactivating the additional
▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
                                                     functions
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele‐       Activate the functions before pairing to be able
  phone.                                             to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source.          able mobile phones, refer to page 192, that sup‐
▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source,         port this function.
  refer to page 185.                                 1. "Telephone"

Requirements                                         2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"

▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to             3. Open "Options".
  page 192.                                          4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.           5. Select the desired additional function.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on           ▷ "Additional telephone"
  the mobile phone.                                      ▷ "Office"
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made              ▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
  on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
                                                     6. "OK"
  without confirmation or visibility, refer to the
  mobile phone operating instructions.               An additional function cannot be assigned to a
                                                     telephone while it is deactivated.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum          Additional telephone
  of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth
                                                     A mobile phone can be used as an additional te‐
  passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
                                                     lephone.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
                                                     The additional telephone can be used to accept
                                                     incoming calls, refer to page 196. While a call is
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
                                                     active on the additional telephone, received
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply        calls are displayed on the Control Display.
with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone"



                                                                                               193
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication         Telephone


Audio source                                        Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.      Symbol         Function

Pairing and connecting a mobile phone                              Telephone.

     Pairing the mobile phone                                      Additional telephone.
       To avoid becoming distracted and posing                     Audio source.
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐     Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐
tionary.◀                                           hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be con‐
                                                    nected with the vehicle at once.
1. "Telephone"                                      If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"                             to page 195.
3. "Add new phone"
   The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
                                                    Following the initial pairing
   played.                                          ▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in
                                                      the vehicle within a short period of time
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
                                                      when the engine is running or the ignition is
   phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
                                                      switched on.
   instructions: for instance, search for or con‐
   nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.       ▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
                                                      stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are
   The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
                                                      transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
   on the mobile phone display.
                                                      depending on the mobile phone.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
                                                    ▷ Four mobile phones can be paired.
   the mobile phone display.
                                                    ▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
6. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile
                                                      mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
   phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
                                                      cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
   Enter the passkey and confirm.
                                                      operating instructions.
   or
   Compare the control number on the vehicle        Connecting a particular mobile phone
   display with the control number on the mo‐       1. "Telephone"
   bile phone display. Confirm the control num‐
                                                    2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
   ber on the mobile phone and in the vehicle.
                                                    3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
   "OK"
                                                       nected.
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
                                                    The functions assigned to the mobile phone be‐
   phone is to be used.
                                                    fore unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone
8. "OK"                                             when it is reconnected. These functions are de‐
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone     activated in a mobile phone that is already con‐
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.    nected.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and audio device are displayed as symbols when
paired.
White symbol: the function is active.


   194
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                               Telephone      Communication


Configuring the mobile phone                       4. Open "Options".
Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐   5. "Remove phone from list"
vated for paired and connected mobile phones.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config‐
   ured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. At least one function must be selected.
   ▷ "Telephone"
                                                   What to do if...
   ▷ "Additional telephone"                        Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
   ▷ "Audio"                                       page 192.
7. "OK"                                            The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
If a function has already been assigned to an‐     nected.
other connected mobile phone, the function is      ▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
deactivated in that mobile phone and the mobile      the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
phone is unpaired when the function is assigned      vehicle and on the mobile phone.
to a new mobile phone.                             ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
                                                     phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
Swapping the telephone and additional                same passkey on the mobile phone and via
telephone                                            iDrive.
The function of the telephone and additional te‐   ▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
lephone can be swapped automatically.                the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
1. "Telephone"                                     ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"                              to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐
                                                     nections with other devices if necessary.
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
                                                   ▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
Unpairing the mobile phone                           vate the audio connection.
1. "Telephone"                                     ▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
                                                     does it have only a limited remaining battery
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
                                                     life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un‐      in adapter or via the charging cable.
   paired.
                                                   ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
                                                     ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐
                                                     nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected
                                                     mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and
                                                     connect only one mobile phone.
                                                   The mobile phone no longer reacts.
                                                   ▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.



                                                                                           195
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication          Telephone


▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or low?          Controls
  Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme
  environmental conditions.                            Adjusting the volume
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
  telephone and is the additional telephone
  function deactivated? Activate the function.
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
  the mobile phone as a telephone.
No phone book entries or only some phone book
entries are displayed, or they are incomplete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
  not yet complete.                                    Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
                                                       lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
                                                       trol currently in use.
  tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
  transmitted.                                         The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book         the microphone on the telephone and the vol‐
  entries with special characters.                     ume of the called party. Depending on the mo‐
                                                       bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
                                                       justed. The settings can only be created during
  stored is too high.
                                                       a call and must be adjusted separately for each
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,         telephone. The settings are deleted when the
  e. g., due to stored information such as             telephone is unpaired.
  notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
  tact.                                                1. "Settings"
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio            2. "Tone"
  source or additional telephone? The mobile           3. "Volume settings"
  phone must be connected as a telephone.
                                                       4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or
The phone connection quality is poor.                     "Loudspeak."
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the          5. To adjust: turn the controller.
  mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
                                                       6. To store: press the controller.
  on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in             Incoming call
  adapter or place it in the area of the center
  console.                                             Receiving calls
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and              If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
  loudspeakers separately.                             book and is transmitted by the network, the
If all points in this list have been checked and the   name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise,
required function is still not available, contact      only the phone number is displayed.
Customer Relations or the service center.              If more than one phone number is assigned to a
                                                       contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
                                                       played.




   196
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                 Telephone        Communication


For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐      Entering a phone number
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.                                             Dialing a number
An incoming call to one of the telephones is au‐     1. "Telephone"
tomatically rejected if there is an active call on   2. "Dial number"
the other telephone.
                                                     3. Select the digits individually.
Accepting a call                                     4.      Select the symbol.

         Press the button on the steering wheel.

or
     "Accept"




                                                     The phone number can also be entered by voice.

                                                     Calls with multiple parties

                                                     General information
                                                     You can switch between calls or connect two
Rejecting a call                                     calls to a single conference call. These functions
     "Reject"                                        must be supported by the mobile phone and
                                                     service provider.
Ending a call
         Press the button on the steering wheel.     Accepting a call while speaking to
                                                     another party
or                                                   This function might have to be activated by the
                                                     service provider and the mobile phone must be
1. "Telephone"                                       adjusted accordingly.
2.      "End call"                                   If a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
                                                     a call waiting signal is sounded.
                                                          "Accept"
                                                     The call is accepted and the existing call is put
                                                     on hold.

                                                     Establishing a second call
                                                     Establish an additional call during an active call.

                                                     1. "Telephone"
                                                     2. "Active calls"
                                                     3.      "Hold"


                                                                                                197
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
     Communication        Telephone


     The existing call is put on hold.               DTMF suffix dialing
                                                     DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
                                                     cess to network services or for controlling devi‐
                                                     ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer‐
                                                     ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this
                                                     purpose.
                                                     1. "Telephone"
                                                     2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
                                                        number".
                                                     3.     "Keypad dialing"
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
   a list.                                           4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
     "Return"
                                                     Phone book
The call on hold is resumed.
                                                     Displays
Switching between two calls, hold call
                                                     The phone book accesses the contacts and
The active call is displayed in color.               shows all contacts for which a phone number
The call on hold is displayed in gray.               has been stored. The entries can be selected to
     "Swap calls"                                    make a call.

The call on hold is resumed.                         1. "Telephone"
                                                     2. "Phone book"
Establishing a conference call
                                                     A symbol indicates the storage location of the
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐         contacts.
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2.         "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.

Switching the microphone to mute
When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.

1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3.         "Microphone mute"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated:
▷ When a new connection is established.
▷ When switching between call parties.


     198
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                               Telephone       Communication


Calling a contact                                  Dialing the number via the iDrive
                                                   1. "Telephone"
Symbol Meaning
                                                   2. "Redial"
          Contact with one stored phone num‐
          ber.

          Contact with more than one stored
          phone number.

          Call not possible; mobile phone with‐
          out reception or network, or Service
          Request is active.


For contacts with one stored phone number: se‐     3. Select the desired entry and the phone num‐
lect the required contact. The connection is be‐      ber if necessary.
ing established.
                                                   The connection is established.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the        Deleting a single entry or all entries
phone number. The connection is being estab‐
                                                   The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐
lished.
                                                   ular mobile phone.
Editing a contact                                  1. Highlight the entry.
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a         2. Open "Options".
contact is changed, the changes are not stored     3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.                             Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the contact.                          1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".                                 2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"                                    3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
The contact can be edited.                            contact"
                                                   4. Select the contact if necessary.
Redialing                                          5. Select the type of number: "Home",
                                                      "Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
General information
                                                   6. Complete the entries if necessary.
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
                                                   7. "Store contact"
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are
displayed that were dialed from the vehicle.       Received calls
The 20 phone numbers dialed last are displayed.    Displaying calls
The sorting order of the phone numbers de‐
                                                   The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐
pends on the particular mobile phone.
                                                   played.

                                                   1. "Telephone"



                                                                                            199
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication           Telephone


2. "Received calls"                                 From the mobile phone to the hands-
                                                    free system
                                                    Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
                                                    range of the vehicle can be continued on the
                                                    hands-free system with the ignition switched
                                                    on.
                                                    Depending on the mobile phone, the system au‐
                                                    tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
                                                    If the system does not switch over automatically,
                                                    follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
                                                    play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
Calling a number from the list                      instructions.
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established.                      From the hands-free system to the
                                                    mobile phone
Deleting a single entry or all entries              Calls that are made on the hands-free system
The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐     can in some cases be continued on the mobile
ular mobile phone.                                  phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
                                                    Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
1. Highlight the entry.
                                                    play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
2. Open "Options".                                  instructions.
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts                     Voice operation
1. Highlight the entry.
                                                    General information
2. Open "Options".
                                                    Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys‐
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
                                                    tem: operation, refer to page 25.
   contact"
                                                    Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation
4. Select the contact if necessary.
                                                    system: depending on the equipment, the mo‐
5. Select the type of number: "Home",               bile phone can be voice operated as described
   "Business", "Mobile" or "Other"                  below.
6. Complete the entries if necessary.               The list of short commands in the Owner's
7. "Store contact"                                  Manual does not apply to this type of voice op‐
                                                    eration.
Hands-free system
                                                    The concept
General information                                 ▷ The mobile phone can be operated without
Calls that are being made on the hands-free           taking your hands from the steering wheel.
system can be continued on the mobile phone         ▷ In many cases, the entries are accompanied
and vice versa.                                       by announcements or questions.
                                                    ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
                                                      operation system.


   200
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                 Telephone       Communication


▷ ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the        The system says: »Dialing number«.
  voice operation system.
                                                     Calling
Using voice activation
                                                     Dialing a phone number
Activating the voice activation system               1. ›Dial number‹
                                                     2. Say the phone number.
1.            Press the button on the steering
     wheel.                                          3. ›Dial‹
2. Say the command.
                                                     Correcting the phone number
Terminating the voice activation                     The sequence of digits can be deleted after the
system                                               system has repeated the digits.
                                                     ›Correct number‹
         Press the button on the steering wheel
         or ›Cancel‹.                                The command can be repeated as often as nec‐
                                                     essary.

Possible commands                                    Deleting a phone number
Having possible commands read aloud                  ›Delete‹
                                                     All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
         Press the button on the steering wheel.
         ›Help‹.                                     Redialing
Possible commands are announced.                     ›Redial‹
The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The
                                                     Voice phone book
digits can be spoken separately or combined in
a sequence to accelerate the entry.                  Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
                                                     may be necessary to create your own voice
Using alternative commands                           phone book.
The system often recognizes a number of dif‐         The entries must be entered using voice activa‐
ferent commands to run a function; for instance:     tion and are separate from the memory in the
                                                     mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹
                                                     Saving an entry
Example: dialing a phone number
                                                     1. ›Save name‹
1.            Press the button on the steering       2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
     wheel.                                             duration of approx. 2 seconds.
2. ›Dial number‹                                     3. Say the phone number after being prompted
     The system says: »Please say the number«.          to do so by the system.

3. For instance, ›123 456 790‹                       4. ›Save‹

     The system says: »123 456 790. Continue?
                                                     Deleting an entry
     «.
                                                     1. ›Delete name‹
4. ›Dial‹



                                                                                               201
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication          Telephone


2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.       Environmental conditions
3. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹                         ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
                                                       smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
Deleting all entries                                   sis, and speed.
1. ›Delete phone book‹                               ▷ Always say commands in the language of
2. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹                           the system. The language for the mobile
                                                       phone voice operation is preset and cannot
3. Confirm the prompt again: ›Yes‹
                                                       be changed in the Control Display.

Reading and selecting entries                        ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
                                                       closed to prevent noise interference.
1. ›Read phonebook‹
                                                     ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
2. When the desired entry is read aloud:
                                                       while speaking.
   say ›Dial number‹

Selecting an entry
                                                     Snap-in adapter
1. ›Dial name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.       General information
3. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹                         More information on compatible snap-in adapt‐
                                                     ers that support the functions of the mobile
Adjusting the volume                                 phone is available at the service center.

                                                     Notes
                                                     At high temperatures, the charging function of
                                                     the mobile phone may be limited and functions
                                                     may not be executed.
                                                     When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
                                                     note the operating instructions of the mobile
                                                     phone.

Turn the knob during an announcement.                Installation position
                                                     In the center armrest.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
  volume of other audio sources is changed.          Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control        1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
  currently in use.

Notes
Do not use voice operation to initiate an Emer‐
gency Request. In stressful situations, the voice
and vocal pitch can change. This can unneces‐
sarily delay the establishment of a telephone
connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 253, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

   202
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                               Telephone     Communication


2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐    Removing the mobile phone
   row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
   gages.




                                                   Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

3. To remove the snap-in adapter: press but‐
   ton 1.




Inserting the mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
   the protective cap from the antenna con‐
   nector and from the USB connection of the
   mobile phone.
2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobile
   phone up toward the electrical contacts and
   press it down until it engages.




The battery is charged beginning with the radio
ready state of the vehicle.


                                                                                        203
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication         Office



Office
Vehicle equipment                                    ▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
                                                       page 72, are correctly set on the Control
This chapter describes all series equipment as         Display and on the mobile phone, for in‐
well as country-specific and special equipment         stance to correctly display appointments.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                     ▷ Office is activated, refer to page 193.
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
                                                     Updating
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐    Data are updated every time the mobile phone
tems.                                                is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐
                                                     tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated
                                                     separately.
At a glance                                          1. "Office"
                                                     2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
General information                                     "Notes" or "Reminders"
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐
                                                     3. Open "Options".
sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can
be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile    4. "Update data"
phone provides compatible support of these              Cell phone data are transmitted again to the
functions and the necessary Bluetooth stan‐             vehicle.
dards.
Information about which mobile phones support
the Office functions can be found at                 Office information
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number
                                                     The number of unread messages and active
of compatible mobile phones is available for Of‐
                                                     tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are
fice.
                                                     displayed.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary.                           1. "Office"

The mobile phone has read-access only.               2. "Current office"
                                                     3. Select the desired entry to display details.
      Do not use Office while driving
      To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀

Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
  vehicle and connected. In some mobile
  phones, data access must be confirmed on
  the mobile phone.


   204
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     Office     Communication



Contacts                                             Dialing phone numbers
                                                     1. Select the desired contact.
Note                                                 2. Select the phone number.
Equipment version with the mobile phone prep‐           The connection is established.
aration package.
                                                     Editing a contact
At a glance
                                                     1. Select the desired contact.
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
                                                     2. "Edit contact"
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone numbers
can be dialed.

Displaying contacts

General information
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"                                        3. Change the entries.
                                                     4. "Store contact in vehicle"
                                                     When a contact is edited, the changes are not
                                                     stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
                                                     is stored in the vehicle.

                                                     Selecting the contact as a navigation
                                                     destination
                                                     1. Select the desired contact.
                                                     2. Select the address.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
                                                        When contacts from the mobile phone are
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
                                                        used, the address may need to be matched
search is offered, refer to page 23.
                                                        to the navigation data contained in the vehi‐
A symbol indicates the storage location of the          cle. In this case:
contacts.
                                                        Correct the address.
Symbol        Storage location                       3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
                                                        destination"
No sym‐       In the vehicle; the address has not
bol           been checked as a destination.
                                                     Checking the address as a destination
              In the vehicle; the address has        An address that is to be used for destination
              been checked as a destination.         guidance must match the navigation data con‐
              Mobile phone.




                                                                                             205
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication          Office


tained in the vehicle. The address can be                  If necessary, "Accept address".
checked for this purpose.                              9. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
   address.                                            Contact types
2. Open "Options".                                     Various contact types can be assigned to phone
                                                       numbers and addresses.
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.         Symbol        Meaning

If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of                    Home phone number.
it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
                                                                     Business phone number.
changed on the mobile phone.
                                                                     Mobile phone number.
New contact
                                                                     Other phone number.
General information                                                  Home address.
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐                       Business address.
net address.

1. "Office"
                                                       Specifying the home address
                                                       A home address can be stored. It appears at the
2. "Contacts"
                                                       top of the contact list.
3. Open "Options".
                                                       1. "Office"
4. "New contact"
                                                       2. "Contacts"
                                                       3. "Home"
                                                       4. Create a contact.
                                                       5. "Store contact in vehicle"

                                                       Selecting the sorting order of the
                                                       names
                                                       Names can be displayed in a different order.

5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐   1. "Office"
   ous entries: "Delete input fields"                  2. "Contacts"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next    3. Open "Options".
   to the entry field.                                 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type.            last name"
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation        Depending on how the contacts were stored on
   system: enter the address. Only addresses           the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names
   contained in the navigation data in the vehi‐       may differ from the selected sorting order.
   cle can be entered. This ensures that desti‐
   nation guidance is possible for all ad‐
   dresses.



   206
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                       Office     Communication


Show contact pictures                                 Displaying messages
Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in       1. "Office"
the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected        2. "Messages"
to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic‐
                                                      A symbol identifies the type of message.
tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function.                     Symbol Message type
1. "Office"                                                     Text messages.
2. "Contacts"
                                                                My Info
3. Open "Options".
                                                                Message from the Concierge serv‐
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
                                                                ice.
5. "Show images"
                                                                E-mail from mobile phone.
Display of all contact pictures is activated or de‐
activated.
                                                      Filtering the message list
Deleting contacts                                     The message list can be filtered if more than one
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are      type of message exists.
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can‐
                                                      1. "Filter:"
not be deleted.

1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
6. If necessary. "Yes"


                                                      2. Select the type of message.
Messages                                                 ▷ "All"
General information                                          All messages are displayed.
Whether or not text messages and e-mails from            ▷ "E-mail"
the mobile phone are displayed depends on                    Only e-mails from the mobile phone are
whether transmission from the mobile phone to                displayed.
the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e-           ▷ "Service message"
mails may not be supported by the service pro‐
vider, or the function may need to be enabled                Only messages from the BMW Assist
separately. After the mobile phone is first paired,          Concierge service and My Info are dis‐
transmission may take several minutes. Mes‐                  played.
sages are only displayed in full length when the         ▷ "Text message"
vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi‐               Only text messages from the mobile
tional telephone are not transmitted.                        phone are displayed.




                                                                                               207
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
     Communication     Office


Deleting messages                                 My Info
Messages from the Concierge service and
My Info can be deleted.                           Selecting additional functions
Delete a message:                                 Additional functions are available when a mes‐
                                                  sage is selected.
1. "Office"
                                                   Symbol Function
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.                              "Start guidance" or "Add as another
                                                            destination"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete message"                                         "Call"
Delete all messages:                                        If the message contains a number,
                                                            the connection is established.
1. "Office"
                                                            "Select phone number"
2. "Messages"
                                                            If the message contains more than
3. Open "Options".
                                                            one number, select the desired num‐
4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service                 ber from the list. The connection is
   messages"                                                established.

Text messages
                                                  Message from the Concierge service
Calling the sender of a text message
                                                  Storing an address
1. Select the desired message.
                                                  1. Select the desired message.
2.      Select the symbol.
                                                  2. Open "Options".
Saving the sender in the contacts                 3. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. Highlight the desired message.
                                                  Selecting additional functions
2. Open "Options".
                                                  Additional functions are available when a mes‐
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
                                                  sage is selected.
   contact"
                                                   Symbol Function
Using contact data
                                                            "Start guidance" or "Add as another
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text                 destination"
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 211.                                "Call"
                                                            If the message contains a number,
Reading the text message out loud                           the connection is established.
Read the text message out loud, refer to
page 211.




     208
                         Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                       Office     Communication



Symbol Function                                          Only a part of the email from the cell phone
                                                         is loaded into the vehicle.
          "Select phone number"
          If the message contains more than           Reading the e-mail out loud
          one number, select the desired num‐         Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 211.
          ber from the list. The connection is
          established.

          "Further information"                       Calendar
          Display additional information.
                                                      Display the calendar
                                                      Appointments during the last 20 days and the
E-mail                                                next 50 days can be displayed.

Displaying e-mails                                    1. "Office"
1. "Office"                                           2. "Calendar"
2. "Messages"                                            The appointments on the current day are
                                                         displayed.
3. Select the desired e-mail.

                                                      Selecting the calendar day
Displaying e-mail contacts
                                                      1. Select the date.
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans‐
mitted by the mobile phone, this information is
displayed in the e-mail.
    "Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con‐
tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.

                                                      2. Select the desired day or date.
Using contact data
                                                         ▷ "Next day"
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or             ▷ "Date:"
selected, refer to page 211.                             ▷ "Previous day"
                                                         ▷ "Today"
Deactivating the full display
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e-       Display the appointment
mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may    1. Select the desired appointment.
result in charges.
                                                      2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
1. "Office"                                              sary:
2. "Messages"                                            ▷ Turn the controller.
3. Open "Options".                                       ▷            Select the symbol.
4. "Fully download e-mails"


                                                                                              209
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication         Office


Using contact data                                 Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text        Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or       messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 211.                       selected, refer to page 211.

Reading the appointment out loud                   Reading the task out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to            Read the task out loud, refer to page 211.
page 211.

                                                   Notes
Tasks
                                                   Displaying notes
Displaying the task list                           1. "Office"
Display tasks that are due within the next         2. "Notes"
90 days.
                                                       All notes are displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Tasks"                                         Displaying the note
                                                   1. Select the desired note.
Sorting the task list
1. Select the header in the task list.




                                                   2. Scroll in the note if necessary:
                                                       ▷ Turn the controller.
2. Select the sorting criterion:                       ▷            Select the symbol.
    ▷ "Priority (!)"
    ▷ "Subject"                                    Using contact data
    ▷ "Due date"                                   Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
                                                   messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
Displaying the task                                selected, refer to page 211.

1. Select the desired task.
                                                   Reading the note out loud
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
                                                   Read the note out loud, refer to page 211.
    ▷ Turn the controller.
    ▷            Select the symbol.




   210
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                      Office     Communication



Reminders                                           Reading out loud
                                                    Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
Displaying reminders
                                                    tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a      1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.      task, or note.
                                                    2.      Select the symbol.
1. "Office"
                                                    The following options are available during read‐
2. "Reminders"
                                                    ing:
3. Select the desired reminder.
                                                    ▷      "Pause"
The corresponding appointment or the task are
                                                         Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
displayed.
                                                         reading.
                                                    ▷       "Back to beginning"
Using contact data                                       Start reading the message again from the
                                                         beginning.
At a glance                                         ▷       Select the symbol.
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text              Go back one paragraph.
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
                                                    ▷       Select the symbol.
selected.
                                                         Skip a paragraph.
Displaying contact or selecting phone               ▷ To end reading, turn the controller to the left.
number
1.      "Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone          What to do if...
   number:                                          Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
     ▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐    page 192.
       tails.                                       Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
     ▷ Select the phone number to establish a       e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐
       connection directly.                         played.
                                                    ▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the
Storing contact data                                  missing function or is not connected cor‐
1.      "Use contact data"                            rectly.
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐         ▷ The Office function is deactivated.
   dress.                                           ▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
3. Open "Options".                                    tional phone.
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new       ▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or are
   contact"                                           more than 50 days in the future.
                                                    ▷ The tasks have been marked as completed
                                                      or have a due date that lies more than
                                                      90 days in the future.




                                                                                              211
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication          Office


▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐
  pointments, task notes, and messages in
  the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the
  vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile
phone are displayed at the right time?
▷ The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set
  on the Control Display and mobile phone.
The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
▷ E-mails are transmitted without an attach‐
  ment.
Entries are not displayed in full length.
▷ Text were already transmitted from the mo‐
  bile phone in a shortened form.
▷ Synchronization between the mobile phone
  and vehicle may take several minutes.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
▷ Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
  the vehicle.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
▷ Check the e-mail settings on the telephone
  and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.




   212
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                     Contacts       Communication



Contacts
Vehicle equipment                                      4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
                                                          to the entry field.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.



Note                                                   5. Enter the text, refer to page 23.

Equipment version without the mobile phone                 In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys‐
preparation package.                                       tem: it is only possible to enter addresses
                                                           that are contained in the vehicle navigation
                                                           data. This ensures that destination guid‐
                                                           ance is possible for all addresses.
General information
                                                       6. If necessary, "Store".
Contacts can be created and edited and the ad‐
                                                       7. "Store contact in vehicle"
dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav‐
igation.
                                                       Specifying the home address
                                                       A home address can be stored. It appears at the
New contact                                            top of the contact list.
                                                       1. "Home"
1. "Contacts"
                                                       2. Create a contact.
2. "New contact"
                                                       3. "Store contact in vehicle"



                                                       My contacts
                                                       General information
                                                       List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.

                                                       Displaying contacts
                                                       1. "Contacts"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
   ous entries: "Delete input fields"




                                                                                                     213
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication          Contacts


2. "My contacts"                                     2. Select the address.
                                                     3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
                                                        destination"

                                                     Checking the address as a destination
                                                     An address that is to be used for destination
                                                     guidance must match the navigation data con‐
                                                     tained in the vehicle. The address can be
                                                     checked for this purpose.
                                                     1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐      address.
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
                                                     2. Open "Options".
search is offered, refer to page 23.
                                                     3. "Check as destination"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:                                            4. Correct and store the address if necessary.

Symbol       Storage location                        Selecting the sorting order of the
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not        names
          been checked as a destination.             Names can be displayed in a different order.

             In the vehicle; the address has         1. "My contacts"
             been checked as a destination.          2. Open "Options".
                                                     3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
Editing a contact                                       last name"
1. Select the desired contact.
                                                     Deleting contacts
2. "Edit contact"
                                                     1. "My contacts"
                                                     2. Highlight the contact.
                                                     3. Open "Options".
                                                     4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"




3. Change the entries.
4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"

Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1. Select the desired contact.



   214
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                          ConnectedDrive        Communication



ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment                                   ▷ BMW Assist is activated.

This chapter describes all series equipment as      Services offered
well as country-specific and special equipment
                                                    ▷ Emergency Request: when you press the
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                      SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐
describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                      sist Response Center is established. The
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
                                                      BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
special equipment or the country version. This
                                                      with you and takes further steps to help you.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.                                               ▷ Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐
                                                      tain conditions, a connection is established
                                                      to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
                                                      serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐
BMW Assist
                                                      sist Response Center then speaks with you
                                                      and takes further steps to help you.
General information
BMW Assist provides you with certain services,      ▷ Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
e.g., transmission of the position data of your       Roadside Assistance can be contacted if as‐
vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if          sistance is needed in the event of a break‐
an Emergency Request has been initiated.              down. If possible, the vehicle and position
                                                      data are transmitted in the process.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐
vidually agreed upon contract.                      ▷ Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐
                                                      tomer Relations for information on all as‐
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist       pects of your vehicle.
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without your having to visit a      ▷ TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
service center. After the BMW Assist system           status or required inspections are transmit‐
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services          ted to your service center, either automati‐
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be       cally before a service due date or when you
reactivated by a service center after you sign a      request a BMW service appointment.
new contract.                                       ▷ Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐
                                                      sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐
Requirements                                          ample, the remote control is not available
▷ The installed BMW Assist system is logged           and the vehicle needs to be opened.
  in to a wireless communications network.          ▷ Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
  This network must be capable of transmit‐           that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
  ting the services.                                  BMW Assist Response Center can deter‐
▷ To transmit position data, the vehicle must         mine its position.
  be able to determine the current position.        ▷ In addition to these services, the optional
▷ The BMW Assist service contract was                 Convenience Plan offers Concierge service
  signed with your service center or with the         and information for route planning, traffic,
  BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling                and weather. A limited number of calls can
  must have been completed.                           be made via the BMW Assist Response
                                                      Center with Critical Calling if, for example,


                                                                                             215
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication         ConnectedDrive


   the mobile phone is not available or dis‐        Concierge service
   charged.
   Press the SOS button to contact the BMW          General information
   Assist Response Center.                          The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
                                                    mation on events, gas stations, and hotels, and
                                                    provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels
TeleService                                         can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐
                                                    cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
General information                                 the optional Convenience Plan.
TeleService supports communication with your
service center.                                     Starting the Concierge service
▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements        1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
  can be sent directly to the service center. In    2. "Concierge"
  this way, the service center can plan its work
  in advance. This shortens the duration of the
  service appointment.
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐
  hicle's condition can be sent directly to
  Roadside Assistance.
▷ The service varies by country.
▷ Connection costs may ensue.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
                                                    3. "Start service"
Requirements                                        A voice connection is established with the BMW
▷ BMW Assist is activated.                          Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
                                                    addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
   If BMW Assist is not activated, a mobile
   phone that has been recommended by
   BMW for TeleService and that is configured
   for mobile data communication must be            Messages
   connected with the vehicle.                      Information on messages, refer to page 207.
▷ Wireless reception is available.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
                                                    Roadside Assistance
Using TeleService
The TeleServices are typically activated in the
                                                    At a glance
vehicle.                                            BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
                                                    assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
Even if the TeleServices are not active, a voice
                                                    down.
contact to Roadside Assistance is still possible.
                                                    Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
To continue using or to deactivate the services,
                                                    a Check Control message, refer to page 77.
please contact your service partner or the BMW
customer hotline.




   216
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                         ConnectedDrive        Communication


Starting Roadside Assistance without               After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
BMW Assist or TeleService                          nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"                lished.

2. "Roadside Assistance"
   The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐          BMW Online
   played. If the mobile phone is paired, a con‐
   nection is established to Roadside Assis‐       At a glance
   tance.
                                                   A business search can be opened via BMW On‐
                                                   line.
                                                   License conditions
                                                   This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
                                                   ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
                                                   ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
                                                   NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
                                                   of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐
                                                   tries.
                                                   This software is based in part on the work of the
Starting Roadside Assistance with                  Independent JPEG Group.
BMW Assist or TeleService
                                                   Requirements
General information                                ▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
In vehicles equipped with TeleService, support       Plan.
is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and
                                                   ▷ The date setting on the Control Display is
then, if necessary, by TeleService Help.
                                                     current.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"                ▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
2. "Roadside Assistance"                             work coverage.
3. "Start service"
                                                   Starting BMW Online
                                                   1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
                                                   2. "BMW Online"




TeleService Diagnosis
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are     3. If necessary, "OK".
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are    The BMW Online home page is displayed.
transmitted automatically.


                                                                                            217
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication         ConnectedDrive


Operating BMW Online                               Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
To start a search:                                 TeleService
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.     1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
▷ Press the controller to display an element.      2. "Customer Relations"
                                                   3. "Start service"
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"                            Service Request
                                                   At a glance
                                                   Sends information to your service partner to re‐
                                                   quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐
                                                   ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
                                                   ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
                                                   partner will establish contact with you.

                                                   Starting a Service Request
                                                   1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
Loading a new page                                 2. "Service Request"
1. Open "Options".                                 3. "Start service"
2. "Reload"

Cancel
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"



Customer Relations
At a glance                                        A Service Request can be started via a Check
                                                   Control message, refer to page 77.
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations                         Automatic Service Request
                                                   The TeleService data necessary for servicing
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist               the vehicle are automatically sent to your service
or TeleService                                     partner prior to the service deadline. If possible,
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"                the service partner will contact you and a service
                                                   appointment can be arranged.
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec‐
tion is established to Customer Relations.


   218
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                           ConnectedDrive         Communication


To check when your service partner was noti‐         Data transfer
fied:
                                                     During the updating of BMW services, display
1. "Vehicle Info"                                    the status of the data transfer.
2. "Vehicle status"
                                                     1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
                                                     2. Open "Options".
                                                     3. "Data transfer"



                                                     Apps
                                                     At a glance
                                                     Certain software applications of a suitable cell
3. Open "Options".                                   phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These
                                                     software applications are displayed on the Con‐
4. "Last Service Request"                            trol Display.
                                                     They are operated via iDrive.
Services status                                      Requirements
Displaying available services                        ▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
Display of all services available in the vehicle.    ▷ The mobile phone operating system sup‐
                                                       ports the software applications of Apps.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
                                                     ▷ Software applications are installed on the
2. "Service Status"                                    cell phone and ready to use.
3. "Available services"                              ▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
                                                         Any additionally incurred costs are not a part
                                                         of Apps.
                                                     ▷ Use only BMW approved software applica‐
                                                       tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc‐
                                                       tions.
                                                     Information about suitable cell phones, available
                                                     software applications and their installation can
                                                     be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at
                                                     the service center.

Updating BMW Assist                                        Create the entries.
Manual update of TeleService and BMW Assist.              Make entries only when traffic and road
                                                     conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"                  pants and other road users may be put in danger
2. "Service Status"                                  because of the distraction from driving.
3. "Update BMW Assist"                               For reasons of safety, some software applica‐
                                                     tions are usable only while the vehicle is station‐
                                                     ary.◀


                                                                                                219
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
  Communication         ConnectedDrive


Operating Apps                                     ▷ Some mobile phones cannot simultane‐
1. Connect the cell phone via the snap-in            ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-
   adapter or via the USB audio interface.           free system.

2. "ConnectedDrive"                                    If necessary, restart the software application
                                                       on the cell phone after a phone conversa‐
3. Select the desired software application.
                                                       tion.

Displaying status
Information about the currently available soft‐
ware applications can be displayed.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"

PlugIn
Selected functions of the cell phone are dis‐
played on the Control Display. They can be op‐
erated via iDrive.

1. Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the
   controller and select, for example, a desired
   category or track.
     Press button to switch within the cell
     phone functions to a higher level or back.

     Press button twice to switch back to the
     main menu.


Notes
▷ The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on
  the Control Display depend on the range of
  installed software applications on the mo‐
  bile phone.
▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐
  plications from the cell phone to the vehicle
  can last some time. Some software applica‐
  tions depend on the speed of the available
  Internet connection of the cell phone.




   220
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                   ConnectedDrive     Communication




                                                               221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                        Mobility
                           In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
                             find important information on operating fluids,
                               wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
                                                 Assistance in the following.




Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility     Refueling



Refueling
Vehicle equipment                                   Fuel cap
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                    Opening
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also    1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
describes equipment that may not be found in           flap.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.



General information
     Refuel promptly
      At the latest, refuel at a range of
                                                    2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀               3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
                                                       the fuel filler flap.


Notes
     Switch off the engine before refueling
       Always switch off the engine before refu‐
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.◀

     Observe when handling fuel
     ▷ Take all precautionary measures and
       observe all applicable regulations           Closing
       when handling fuel.
                                                    1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you
▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers in            clearly hear a click.
  your vehicle. They can develop a leak and
                                                    2. Close the fuel filler flap.
  cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
  event of an accident.◀                                  Do not pinch the retaining strap
                                                          Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
                                                    to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
                                                    properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
                                                    A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
                                                    missing.




   224
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                   Refueling     Mobility


Manually unlocking fuel filler flap                   X1 xDrive28i/X1 xDrive35i: approx. 16.6 US gal/
In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap   63 liters.
can be released manually:




1. Press the cover out of the cargo area side
   panel at the rear and remove it.
2. Take the button with the fuel pump symbol
   out of the holder toward the front and pull.
   This releases the fuel filler flap.



Observe the following when
refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature pump shutoff.
▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐
  ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
      Do not overfill the fuel tank
      Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise, es‐
caping fuel may harm the environment or dam‐
age the vehicle.◀

      Handling fuels
      Follow the safety instructions provided at
gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of per‐
sonal injury and property damage.◀



Fuel tank capacity
X1 sDrive28i: approx. 16.1 US gal/61 liters.

                                                                                             225
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility      Fuel



Fuel
Vehicle equipment                                     The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you
                                                      can refuel with different gasoline qualities.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment        Recommended fuel quality
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                      BMW recommends AKI 91.
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
                                                      Minimum fuel grade
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐     BMW recommends AKI 89.
tems.                                                       Minimum fuel grade
                                                            Do not fill up with fuel below the specified
                                                      minimum quality; otherwise, the engine may not
Fuel quality                                          run properly.◀

Gasoline                                              If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should        ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.         when starting at high outside temperatures.
                                                      This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel pump
as containing metals.                                       Minimum fuel grade

      Only refuel with lead-free gasoline without            The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
      metal additives                                 harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
                                                      ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline        stalling, especially under certain environmental
with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron;       conditions such as high ambient temperature
otherwise, the catalytic converter and other          and high altitude, may occur.
components will be permanently damaged.◀
                                                      If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %,         ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.                 brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number
The ethanol should fulfill the following quality      — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine
standards:                                            deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase
                                                      gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
US: ASTM 4806–xx
                                                      Failure to comply with these recommendations
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
                                                      may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
xx: always adhere to the currently applicable         nance.◀
standard.
      Do not refuel with ethanol E85
     Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐
tem.◀




   226
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                Fuel   Mobility




                                                                  227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility      Wheels and tires



Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment                                     Pressure specifications
                                                      The tables below provide all the correct inflation
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                      pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
well as country-specific and special equipment
                                                      temperature.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in          The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected        approved and tire brands recommended by
special equipment or the country version. This        BMW; a list of these is available from your serv‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐     ice center.
tems.                                                 For correct identification of the right tire inflation
                                                      pressures, observe the following:
                                                      ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure                               ▷ Maximum allowable driving speed.

Safety information
                                                      Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also    100 mph or 160 km/h
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
                                                      For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, ad‐
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
                                                      just pressures to the respective tire inflation
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐
                                                      pressures listed on the following pages in the
sure.
                                                      column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/
                                                      160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
                                                      These tire inflation pressures can also be found
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
                                                      on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
                                                      door is open.
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
      Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
      Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability,
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an             Do not exceed the maximum permissible
accident.◀                                                  speed
                                                      The maximum permissible speed for these tire
After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, reset
                                                      pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h Do not exceed
the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 90, or
                                                      this speed; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
                                                      dents could occur.◀
page 88.




   228
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                            Wheels and tires        Mobility


Tire inflation pressures for driving                   including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/
above 100 mph or 160 km/h                              h. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could
                                                       occur.◀
      Adjust the tire inflation pressures
     To drive at maximum speeds in excess of           Observe all national and local maximum speed
100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐          limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could oc‐
spective tire inflation pressures listed on the fol‐   cur.
lowing pages in the column for traveling speeds

Tire inflation pressures X1 sDrive 28i

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Tire size                                                                  Pressure specifications in
                                                                           bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature


225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC                                               2.2/32         2.6/38
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC                                               2.4/35         2.8/41
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC                                                2.4/35         -
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC                                                 -              2.6/38

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC                                                2.6/38         -
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC                                                 -              2.8/41

Compact wheel:                                                             Speeds of up to 50 mph/
T 135/80 R 17 103 M                                                        80 km/h
                                                                           4.2/60


Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h
Without high-speed tuning feature




                                                                                                   229
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Mobility    Wheels and tires



Tire size                                                                Pressure specifications in
                                                                         bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature


225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC                                             2.4/35        2.9/42
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC                                              2.4/35        -
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC                                               -             2.9/42

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC                                              2.6/38        -
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC                                               -             2.9/42

Compact wheel:                                                           Speeds of up to 50 mph/
T 135/80 R 17 103 M                                                      80 km/h
                                                                         4.2/60


With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size                                                                Pressure specifications in
                                                                         bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature


225/50 R 17 94 V RSC                                                     2.4/35        2.9/42
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

225/45 R 18 91 W RSC                                                     2.6/38        3.1/45
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC                                              2.6/38        -
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC                                               -             2.9/42




   230
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                          Wheels and tires        Mobility



Tire size                                                                Pressure specifications in
                                                                         bar/PSI

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC                                              2.8/41        -
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC                                               -             3.1/45

Compact wheel:                                                           Speeds of up to 50 mph/
T 135/80 R 17 103 M                                                      80 km/h
                                                                         4.2/60


Tire inflation pressures X1 xDrive 28i/X1 xDrive 35i

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Tire size                                                                Pressure specifications in
                                                                         bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature


225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC                                             2.2/32        2.6/38
225/50 R 17 94 H RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC                                             2.4/35        2.8/41
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC                                              2.4/35        -
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC                                               -             2.6/38

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC                                              2.6/38        -
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC                                               -             2.8/41

Compact wheel:                                                           Speeds of up to 50 mph/
T 135/80 R 17 103 M                                                      80 km/h
                                                                         4.2/60


Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h
Without high-speed tuning feature




                                                                                                231
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Mobility    Wheels and tires



Tire size                                                                Pressure specifications in
                                                                         bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature


225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC                                             2.4/35        2.9/42
225/50 R 17 94 H RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC                                             2.6/38        3.1/45
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC                                              2.6/38        -
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC                                               -             2.9/42

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC                                              2.6/38        -
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC                                               -             2.9/42

Compact wheel:                                                           Speeds of up to 50 mph/
T 135/80 R 17 103 M                                                      80 km/h
                                                                         4.2/60


With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size                                                                Pressure specifications in
                                                                         bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature


225/50 R 17 94 V RSC                                                     2.6/38        3.0/44
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

225/45 R 18 91 W RSC                                                     2.8/41        3.2/46
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC                                              2.8/41        -
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC                                               -             3.0/44




   232
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                          Wheels and tires        Mobility



Tire size                                                                Pressure specifications in
                                                                         bar/PSI

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC                                              3.0/44        -
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC                                               -             3.2/46

Compact wheel:                                                           Speeds of up to 50 mph/
T 135/80 R 17 103 M                                                      80 km/h
                                                                         4.2/60


Tire identification marks                            Tire age
                                                     The tire manufacturing date is contained in the
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
                                                     tire identification mark: DOT ... 1012 means that
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
                                                     the tire was manufactured in the week 10 of
tires.
                                                     2012.
Tire size                                            BMW recommends that you replace all tires af‐
                                                     ter 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V
                                                     for 10 years.
225: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %                                Uniform Tire Quality Grading
R: radial tire code                                  Quality grades can be found where applicable
17: rim diameter in inches                           on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
                                                     maximum section width. For example:
91: load rating, not for ZR tires
                                                     Treadwear 200 Traction AA
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
                                                     Temperature A
Speed letter
                                                     DOT Quality Grades
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
                                                     Treadwear
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
                                                     Traction AA A B C
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
                                                     Temperature A B C
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
                                                           Conform to Federal Safety Requirements
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
                                                          All passenger car tires must conform to
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
                                                     Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
                                                     these grades.◀
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.                   Treadwear
                                                     The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
DOT code:
                                                     based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
DOT xxxx xxx 1012                                    under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand           ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
xxx: tire size and tire design                       150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
                                                     as well on the government course as a tire
1012: tire age
                                                     graded 100. The relative performance of tires

                                                                                                233
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility      Wheels and tires


depends upon the actual conditions of their use,      RSC – Run-flat tires
however, and may depart significantly from the        The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
norm due to variations in driving habits, service     with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
practices and differences in road characteristics     page 236.
and climate.
                                                      M+S
Traction
                                                      Winter and all-season tires.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
                                                      These have better winter properties than
AA, A, B, and C.
                                                      summer tires.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled          XL
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
                                                      Designation for specially reinforced tires.
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
                                                      Tire tread
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
                                                      Summer tires
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
                                                      Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
Temperature                                           0.12 in/3 mm.

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,         There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the      the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions          Winter tires
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐     Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
tained high temperature can cause the material        0.16 in/4 mm.
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and   Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire         less suitable for winter operation.
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must        Minimum tread depth
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
      Temperature grade for this tire
       The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐          Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
sible tire failure.◀                                  circumference and have the legally required
                                                      minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

                                                      They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
                                                      Tread Wear Indicator.

   234
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                          Wheels and tires        Mobility



Tire damage                                          Changing wheels and tires
General information                                  Mounting
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐           Information on mounting tires
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
                                                           Have mounting and balancing performed
                                                     only by a service center or tire specialist.
Notes
                                                     If this work is not carried out properly, there is
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
                                                     the danger of subsequent damage and related
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
                                                     safety hazards.◀
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning     Wheel and tire combination
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to        Information on the right wheel and tire combi‐
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐        nation and rim version for your vehicle can be
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐   obtained from the service center.
file tires.                                          Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐      function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
fects:                                               DSC.
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.                 To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency         sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
  to pull to the left or right.                      figuration from a single manufacturer.
Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,          Following tire damage, have the original wheel
road damage and similar situations.                  and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
                                                     as soon as possible.
      In case of tire damage
                                                           Approved wheels and tires
      If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the                  The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise,      mends that you use only wheels and tires that
there is the increased risk of an accident.          have been approved for your particular vehicle
                                                     model.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.                                                For example, despite having the same official
                                                     size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
                                                     and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
Otherwise, tire damage can present a life-
                                                     The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and
                                                     ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
other road users.◀
                                                     if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
      Repair of tire damage                          ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
                                                     are mounted.◀
      For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐           Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐         Pressure Monitor
sult.◀                                               When mounting new tires or changing from
                                                     summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
                                                     wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the


                                                                                                235
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility      Wheels and tires


Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect     vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐
a flat tire, refer to page 90. Your service center   cialist or from your service center.
will be glad to advise you.
                                                           Maximum speed for winter tires

Recommended tire brands                                   Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
                                                     winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
                                                     dents can occur.◀

                                                     Run-flat tires
                                                     For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Your
                                                     service center will be glad to advise you.

                                                     Rotating wheels between axles
                                                     The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐     against swapping wheels between the front and
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These          rear axles.
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.    This can impair the handling characteristics.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest        Rotating the tires is not permissible when using
standards for safety and handling.                   different types of tires.

                                                     Storage
Retreaded tires
                                                     Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
                                                     as little exposure to light as possible.
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
                                                     Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
      Retreaded tires                                grease and fuels.
       Possibly substantial variations in the de‐    Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can       sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
                                                     Run-flat tires
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends          Label
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,     RSC label on the tire sidewall.
then display a corresponding sign in the field of



   236
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                            Wheels and tires    Mobility


The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a pressure loss.

Driving with a damaged tire:
▷ Flat Tire Monitor FTM, refer to page 88
▷ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
  page 90

Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.



Snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your service center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow
chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument
might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, it can be bene‐
ficial to temporarily activate DTC, refer to
page 95.




                                                                                           237
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility     Engine compartment



Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment                                   describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                    your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as      special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment      also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also    tems.



Important features in the engine compartment




1   Coolant expansion tank  242                     4   Jump-starting, positive terminal
2   Vehicle identification number                   5   Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding en‐
3   Filler neck for washer fluid for the headlamp       gine oil
    and window washer system  61


Hood                                                If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
                                                    lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
Opening the hood                                    only by a service center.
                                                    If this work is not carried out properly, there is
     Working in the engine compartment
                                                    the danger of subsequent damage and related
      Never attempt to perform any service or       safety hazards.◀
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.



    238
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                     Engine compartment           Mobility


      Risk of damage                                       Hood open when driving
      Before opening the hood, ensure that the             If you see any signs that the hood is not
wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the     completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐
window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀                diately and close it securely.◀

1. Pull the lever.                                         Danger of pinching
                                                          Make sure that the closing path of the
                                                     hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀



                                                     Engine oil
                                                     General information
                                                     Engine oil consumption depends on the driving
                                                     style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty
2. Lift the hood all the way.                        driving style, for example, results in considerably
3. Press the release handle and open the hood.       higher engine oil consumption.
                                                     Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
                                                     after refueling.

                                                     Checking the engine oil level
                                                     Your car is equipped with an electronic engine
                                                     oil level check.

                                                     Requirements
                                                     ▷ The engine must be running and warm after
                                                       the vehicle has been driven for at least
Closing the hood                                       6.2 miles/10 km.
                                                     ▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
                                                       level roadway.

                                                     Display in the instrument cluster
                                                     1. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
                                                        lever up or down repeatedly until the appro‐




Drop the hood from a height of ap‐
prox. 16 in/40 cm. It must be clearly heard to en‐
gage.




                                                                                                239
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility     Engine compartment


   priate symbol appears in the display, ac‐        Symbol           Function
   companied by the word "OIL".
                                                                     Oil level is too high.
                                                                     Overfilling oil damages the en‐
                                                                     gine. Have the vehicle checked
                                                                     immediately.

                                                                     The oil level sensor is defective.
                                                                     Do not add engine oil.
                                                                     It is possible to continue driv‐
                                                                     ing. Note the newly calculated
2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever.                       remaining mileage until the
   The oil level is checked and the reading dis‐                     next oil service, refer to
   played.                                                           page 75. Have the system
                                                                     checked as soon as possible.
Possible displays
                                                    Display via iDrive
Symbol         Function
                                                    1. "Vehicle Info"
               Oil level OK.                        2. "Vehicle status"




               Oil level is being checked.
               This can take about 3 minutes
               if the car is at a standstill on a
               level surface, or about 5 mi‐
               nutes while the car is on the
               move.
                                                    3.          "Engine oil level"
               Oil at minimum level:
               Add a maximum quantity of            Possible messages
               1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil,    ▷ "Engine oil level OK"
               refer to page 241, at the next       ▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."
               opportunity.
                                                    ▷ "Measuring engine oil level..."
                                                         Duration with the engine running: ap‐
                                                         prox. 3 minutes.
                                                         Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
                                                         If engine oil was added, it may take up to
                                                         30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
                                                    ▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
                                                      quart!"



   240
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                   Engine compartment             Mobility


   Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter          Protect children
   of engine oil at the next opportunity, refer          Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
   also to Adding engine oil below.                dren and heed the warnings on the containers
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this            to prevent health risks.◀
  checked."
         Too much engine oil                       Oil types for refilling
          Have the vehicle checked immedi‐
   ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐
                                                   Notes
   gine damage.◀                                         No oil additives

▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this                      Do not use oil additives as these may
  checked." Do not add engine oil. It is possi‐    cause engine damage.◀
  ble to continue driving. Note the newly cal‐
                                                         Viscosity classes of engine oils
  culated remaining mileage until the next oil
  service, refer to page 75. Have the system              When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
  checked as soon as possible.                     the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE viscos‐
                                                   ity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, or
Adding engine oil                                  malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀

                                                   The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
Filler neck                                        engine.
                                                   Due to national regulations, some oil types are
                                                   not available in every country.

                                                   Approved oil types

                                                    Gasoline engine

                                                    BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

                                                    BMW Longlife-01
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of
                                                    BMW Longlife-01 FE
oil only after a corresponding message appears
on the Control Display.
                                                   Further information on approved oil types can be
     Add oil promptly
                                                   obtained from the service center.
     Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, engine damage could result.◀            Alternative oil types
     Too much engine oil                           If the approved engine oils are not available, up
                                                   to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
     Have the vehicle checked immediately;
                                                   specification can be used:
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
age.◀                                               Gasoline engine

                                                    API SM or a higher quality standard




                                                                                                241
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility        Engine compartment


Oil change                                               filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
An oil change should be carried out by the serv‐         the filler neck.
ice center only.




                                                     4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
                                                        the specified level; do not overfill.
                                                     5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
Coolant                                              6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
                                                        nated as soon as possible.
General information
      Danger of burns from hot engine                Disposal
     Do not open the cooling system while the              Comply with the appropriate environmen‐
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may             tal protection regulations when disposing
cause burns.◀                                        of coolant additives.

      Suitable additives
      Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.

Checking the coolant level
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
   cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
   wise slightly to allow any accumulated pres‐
   sure to escape; then continue turning to
   open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
   the maximum and minimum marks in the




   242
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                             Maintenance        Mobility



Maintenance
Vehicle equipment                                   On the Control Display, the remaining distances
                                                    and times for selected maintenance require‐
This chapter describes all series equipment as      ments and any legally required deadlines can be
well as country-specific and special equipment      displayed individually, refer to page 75.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in        Service data in the remote control
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
                                                    Information on the required maintenance is con‐
special equipment or the country version. This
                                                    tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
                                                    service center will read out this data and suggest
tems.
                                                    the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
                                                    hicle.
                                                    Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
BMW Maintenance System
                                                    mote control that you used most recently.
                                                          Setting the correct date
                                                          Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
                                                    to page 73; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS
                                                    Condition Based Service is not ensured.◀

                                                    Storage periods
                                                    Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
                                                    tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
The maintenance system provides information         count.
on required maintenance measures and thus           If this occurs, have a service center update the
provides support in maintaining road safety and     time-dependent maintenance procedures,
the operational reliability of the vehicle.         such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
                                                    changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
                                                    vated-charcoal filter.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐        Service and Warranty
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
                                                    Information Booklet for US
mines the maintenance requirements.                 models and Warranty and
The system makes it possible to adapt the           Service Guide Booklet for
amount of maintenance you need to your user         Canadian models
profile.
                                                    Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
Details on the service requirements, refer to       mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
page 75, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐       Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
play.                                               additional information on service requirements.




                                                                                              243
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Mobility     Maintenance


Maintenance and repair should be performed by       Fuel cap
your service center. Make sure to have regular
                                                              The indicator lamp lights up.
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet               If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
for US models, and in the Warranty and Service               the OBD system may conclude that
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐        fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight‐
tries are proof of regular maintenance.             ened, the display should go out in a short time.



Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis




On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check‐
ing the primary components in the vehicle emis‐
sions.


Emissions
         ▷ The warning lamp lights up:
            Emissions are deteriorating. Have
            the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
            sible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
  cumstances:
   This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
   ing in the engine.
   Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
   tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
   ous engine misfiring within a brief period can
   seriously damage emission control compo‐
   nents, in particular the catalytic converter.

         Display of the previously described mal‐
         functions on Canadian models.




   244
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                     Replacing components        Mobility



Replacing components
Vehicle equipment                                     Front
                                                      1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                         wiper arms, refer to page 61.
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.



Tool kit
                                                      2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.




The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor panel
and storage compartment in the cargo area.            3. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
                                                         fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
                                                      4. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech‐
Wiper blade replacement                                  anism toward the front.

      Do not fold down the wipers without wiper       5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order,
      blades                                             making sure it engages.

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have           Risk of damage
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐               Before opening the hood, ensure that the
shield.◀                                              wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the
                                                      window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀




                                                                                              245
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility     Replacing components


Rear                                                       Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
                                                           xenon headlamps
                                                     Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
                                                     cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
                                                     service center.
                                                     Due to the high voltage present in the system,
                                                     there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
                                                     ried out improperly.◀

                                                           Do not touch the bulbs

1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.                         Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
                                                     your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
                                                     contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
   fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
                                                     and reduce its service life.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech‐
                                                     Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
   anism toward the front.
                                                     hold the bulb by its base.◀


Lamp and bulb replacement                            Light-emitting diodes LED
                                                     Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu‐
Notes                                                cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
                                                     the controls, displays and other equipment in
Lamps and bulbs                                      your vehicle.
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution       These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐
to vehicle safety.                                   ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐
                                                     tional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
                                                     light-emitting diodes.
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with them         Do not remove the covers
or they are not described here.                            Do not remove the covers, and never stare
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs      into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
at the service center.                               wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
      Danger of burns
     Only change bulbs when they are cool;
                                                     Headlamp glass
otherwise, there is the danger of getting            Condensation can form on the inside of the
burned.◀                                             headlamps in cool or humid weather. When you
                                                     drive with the lights switched on, the conden‐
      Working on the lighting system                 sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
     When working on the lighting system, you        lamps do not need to be changed.
should always switch off the lights affected to      If the condensation in the headlamps does not
prevent short circuits.                              evaporate after trips with the lights switched on,
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage         and the amount of moisture in the headlamps
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions       increases, for example if water droplets form,
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀                  have them checked by your service center.




   246
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                   Replacing components         Mobility


Removing the headlamp cover                         2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch. To
The high beam bulbs can be replaced via the            open the locks, turn them counterclockwise
engine compartment, and the low beam and turn          all the way using a coin, for example.
signal bulbs can be replaced via a folding cover
in the wheel arch.




                                                    Halogen headlamps
1   High beam cover
                                                    Low beams and high beams
2   Low beam cover
                                                          Wear protective goggles and gloves
3   Turn signal bulb socket
                                                          Halogen bulbs are pressurized. Therefore,
To remove the covers:                               wear protective goggles and gloves. Otherwise,
▷ High beams: fold out the bracket, arrow 4,        there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is acci‐
  and take the cover out of the guide.              dentally damaged during replacement.◀

▷ Low beams: unscrew the cover, arrow 5.            The low beams and high beams have separate
                                                    covers.
     Attach the covers carefully
                                                    H7 bulb, 55 watt
       When attaching the covers, proceed care‐
fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam‐     1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
age to the headlamp system.◀                           control out of the ignition lock.

Proceed in reverse order when attaching the         2. Low beam: open the folding cover in the
covers.                                                wheel arch, refer to page 247.
                                                    3. Remove the corresponding cover, refer to
Access via the wheel arch                              page 247.
For low beams and turn signals only:                4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

1. Turn the wheel inward.                           5. Slide the wire bracket sideways out of the
                                                       anchor, arrow 1, and fold down, arrow 2.




                                                                                              247
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Mobility      Replacing components


6. Remove the bulb.                                          Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
7. Insert the new bulb.                                      xenon headlamps

8. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it.               Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
                                                       cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
9. Plug in the connector.
                                                       service center.
10. Reattach the cover.
                                                       Due to the high voltage present in the system,
11. Low beam: attach the folding cover in the          there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
    wheel arch.                                        ried out improperly.◀

Parking and roadside parking lamps
                                                       Parking lamps and roadside parking
5-watt bulb, W5W                                       lamps, daytime running lights
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote            H8 bulb, 35 watt
   control out of the ignition lock.
                                                       1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
2. Remove the high beam cover, refer to                   control out of the ignition lock.
   page 247.
                                                       2. Remove the high beam cover, refer to
3. Pull out the bulb socket, see arrow.                   page 247.
                                                       3. Turn the bulb by approx. 90˚, see arrow, and
                                                          pull it out.




4. Pull off the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the bulb socket.
6. Reattach the cover.                                 4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
                                                          reconnect the plug.
Xenon headlamps                                        5. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
                                                       6. Reattach the cover.
Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.




   248
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                     Replacing components          Mobility


Turn signals, front
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
   control out of the ignition lock.
2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch, re‐
   fer to page 247.



                                                      1   Backup lamp
                                                      2   Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp LED
                                                      3   Brake lamp
                                                      4   Turn signal
                                                      5   Inner brake lamp

                                                      If bulb 2 is defective, please contact the service
3. Turn the turn signal bulb socket 1 to the left     center.
   and remove it.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐      Lamps in fender
   ing it to the left for removal and replacement.    All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.
5. Insert the turn signal bulb socket 1 and turn
                                                      1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
   it all the way to the right.
                                                         control out of the ignition lock.
6. Attach the folding cover in the wheel arch.
                                                      2. Press the cover out of the rear cargo area
                                                         side trim and remove it.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 246.
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors use LED
technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.

Tail lamps
The tail lamps consist of two parts. One part is      3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing
in the tailgate and the other is in the fender.          down the upper clip, arrow 1.
P21W bulbs, 21 watt




                                                                                                249
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility     Replacing components


    On the right side, take the button with the      6. Release the bulb holder with the clip, see ar‐
    fuel pump symbol out of the holder toward           rows, and remove it.
    the front if necessary.




                                                     7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐
4. Squeeze the lower clips, arrows 2, and take          ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
   out the bulb holder.                              8. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
5. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐        clicks into place.
   ing it to the left for removal and replacement.   9. Insert the handle for opening manually
6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly         through the tailgate panel opening and
   clicks into place.                                   press it in.
7. Replace the cover.                                10. Reattach the tailgate panel.

Inside brake lamps in the tailgate                   License plate lamp, center brake lamp,
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote          and roadside parking lamp/tail lamp
   control out of the ignition lock.                 These lamps are made using LED technology.
2. Take the warning triangle out of the bracket,     Contact your service center in the event of a
   refer to page 254.                                malfunction.
3. Release the screws of the tailgate panel, ar‐
   rows.
                                                     Changing wheels
                                                     Notes
                                                     Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, refer
                                                     to page 236, as standard equipment.
                                                     They do not need to be replaced immediately in
                                                     the event of a puncture.
                                                     No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
                                                     When mounting new tires or changing from
4. Unclip the tailgate panel by pulling it down‐     summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
   ward.                                             tires for your own safety.
5. Push out the handle for opening manually in       The tools for changing wheels are available as
   the event of an electrical malfunction, refer     accessories from your service center.
   to page 36, insert it through the opening,
   and take off the panel.



   250
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                    Replacing components         Mobility


Jacking points for the vehicle jack                  General information
                                                     Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to
                                                     achieve the full battery life.
                                                     It may be necessary to charge the battery in the
                                                     following cases:
                                                     ▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to drive
                                                       short distances.
                                                     ▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for
                                                       more than one month.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐      Starting aid terminals
cated in the positions shown.
                                                     Only charge using the starting aid terminals, re‐
                                                     fer to page 255, in the engine compartment
                                                     while the engine is switched off.
Vehicle battery
                                                     Power failure
Maintenance                                          After a temporary power loss, some equipment
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐     needs to be reinitialized.
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.       Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
Your service center will be glad to advise you on    ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the positions
questions regarding the battery.                       again, refer to page 47.
                                                     ▷ Time: update, refer to page 72.
Battery replacement
                                                     ▷ Date: update, refer to page 73.
      Use approved vehicle batteries
                                                     ▷ Radio station: save again, refer to page 162.
      Only use vehicle batteries that have been
                                                     ▷ Navigation system: wait for the navigation
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
                                                       system to be operational.
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐        ▷ Panoramic glass sunroof: it may only be pos‐
ble.◀                                                  sible to raise the roof. Have the system ini‐
                                                       tialized by the service center.
After a battery replacement, have the battery
                                                     ▷ Digital compass: recalibrate, refer to
registered on the vehicle by your service center
                                                       page 112.
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.                                           ▷ xDrive: the system automatically initializes
                                                       as you drive. During this time, indicator
Charging the battery                                   lamps light up. If the lamps do not disappear
                                                       during the current trip, have the system
Note                                                   checked.

      Do not connect the charger to the socket
                                                     Disposing of old batteries
      Do not connect the battery charger to the
                                                            Have old batteries disposed of by your
socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as
                                                            service center or bring them to a recy‐
this could damage the battery.◀
                                                            cling center.



                                                                                               251
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility      Replacing components


Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.



Fuses
      Replacing fuses
        Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.◀




Access to fuse box:

1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Release the damper from the bottom holder
   by applying pressure toward the front, ar‐
   row 1.
3. Unlock the glove compartment by pressing
   on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold down.
A pair of plastic tweezers is found on the current
distributor.
Information on the fuses can be found on the
back of the cover.
Spare fuses are available from the service cen‐
ter.




   252
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                      Breakdown assistance        Mobility



Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment                                         An Emergency Request can be made, even
                                                          if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐
This chapter describes all series equipment as            hicle.
well as country-specific and special equipment
                                                      ▷ BMW Assist is activated.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in          ▷ Radio readiness is switched on.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected        ▷ The BMW Assist system is logged in to a
special equipment or the country version. This          wireless communications network sup‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐       ported by BMW Assist.
tems.                                                 ▷ The Assist system is operable.
                                                      Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

Hazard warning flashers                                    Emergency Request not guaranteed
                                                           For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐
                                                      quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
                                                      conditions.◀

                                                      Service contract
                                                      ▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐
                                                        pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐
                                                        tivated by the service center without you
                                                        having to visit a workshop.
The button for the hazard warning system is lo‐           After deactivation, an Emergency Request
cated on the center console.                              is no longer possible.
                                                      ▷ Under certain circumstances, the system
      Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
                                                        can be reactivated by a service center after
      While driving and when using the turn sig‐        you sign a new contract.
nal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in the
exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional turn      Initiating an Emergency Request
signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not be in
                                                      1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
the appropriate position and will be difficult to
detect.◀



Emergency Request
Requirements
▷ Equipment version with full preparation
  package mobile phone.

                                                      2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
                                                         button lights up.


                                                                                               253
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility     Breakdown assistance


▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request            Roadside Assistance
  was initiated.                                     The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 216,
    If the circumstances allow this, remain in the   phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a
    vehicle until the connection has been estab‐     connection to Roadside Assistance can be es‐
    lished.                                          tablished directly.
▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
  BMW Assist Response Center has been es‐
  tablished.                                         Warning triangle
    Once the BMW Assist Response Center has
    received your Emergency Request, the
    BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
    and takes further steps to help you.
    Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
    Assist Response Center can take further
    steps to help you under certain circumstan‐
    ces.
    For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
    termine the necessary rescue measures,           On the inside of the tailgate. To remove, press
    such as the current position of the vehicle if   on the tab, arrow.
    it can be established, are transmitted to the
    BMW Assist Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist          First aid kit
  Response Center cannot be heard on the
  hands-free system, the hands-free system
  may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW
  Assist Response Center may still be able to
  hear you.

Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐     The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.     ment on the right side in the cargo area.

                                                     Some of the articles contained in the first aid
                                                     pouch have a limited service life.
Roadside Assistance
                                                     Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
                                                     ularly and replace any items promptly.
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.




   254
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                      Breakdown assistance        Mobility



Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
                                                      The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
dure.
                                                      compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
      Do not touch live parts                         minal. Pull the cover up and off.
     To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
nents while the engine is running.◀

Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
   hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
   mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in‐
   formation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐       The body ground or a special nut acts as the
   cle.                                               negative terminal.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
   consumers in both vehicles.
                                                      Connecting jumper cables
      Bodywork contact between vehicles               1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
      There must not be any contact between              minal.
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there       2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
is a danger of shorting.◀                                jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
                                                         battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
Starting aid terminals                                   terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
      Connecting order                                3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐
                                                         itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
      Connect the jumper cables in the correct
                                                         sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
                                                         to be started.
from sparking.◀
                                                      4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
                                                         jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
                                                         battery, or to the corresponding engine or
                                                         body ground of the vehicle providing assis‐
                                                         tance.
                                                      5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐
                                                         ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐



                                                                                                255
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility      Breakdown assistance


    sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐                Do not have the vehicle towed
    hicle to be started.                                     Have your vehicle transported on a loading
                                                       platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.            Tow truck
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
   let it run for several minutes at an increased
   idle speed.
    If the vehicle being started has a diesel en‐
    gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
    run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
   in the usual way.
    If the first starting attempt is not successful,
    wait a few minutes before making another                 Do not lift the vehicle
    attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐            Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
    tery to recharge.                                  body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.           result.◀
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
   order.                                              Towing your vehicle
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
                                                       Observe before towing your vehicle
                                                             Light towing vehicle
Tow-starting and towing                                      The towing vehicle must not be lighter
      Observe applicable laws and regulations          than your vehicle, or it will not be possible to
                                                       control vehicle response.◀
      Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.◀                                Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly

      No additional passengers                                Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
                                                       fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
      Do not transport any passengers other
                                                       cause damage.◀
than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed.◀

                                                       Automatic transmission, 6-gear
Automatic transmission, 8-gear:
transporting your vehicle                              Selector lever in position N.
                                                             Adhere to the towing speed and distance
Note                                                        Do not exceed a towing speed of
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.             40 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of
Therefore, contact a service center in the event       90 miles/150 km or damage to the transmission
of a breakdown.                                        can occur.◀




   256
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                    Breakdown assistance            Mobility


Being towed                                         Towing methods
      Follow the towing instructions                      Do not lift the vehicle
    Follow all towing instructions, or vehicle            Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
damage or accidents may occur.◀                     body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
                                                    result.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
  otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
  signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐         Tow bar
  available.                                        The tow fittings used should be on the same
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle         side on both vehicles.
  tilted, as the front wheels could turn.           Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no           the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
  power assist. Consequently, more force            the following:
  needs to be applied when braking and steer‐       ▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will
  ing.                                                be sharply limited during cornering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐           ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
  quired.                                             is attached offset.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
  pending on local regulations.                     Tow rope
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly      When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
  identify the vehicle being towed by placing       the tow rope is taut.
  a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐     To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
  dow.                                              the vehicle components when towing, always
                                                    use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Towing other vehicles                                     Attaching the tow rope correctly

General information                                        Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
                                                    ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐
      Light towing vehicle                          cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
      Your vehicle must not be lighter than the
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be      Tow truck
possible to control vehicle response.◀
                                                    sDrive
      Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
                                                    Vehicles with automatic transmission, 6-gear.
       Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
  pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
  identify the vehicle being towed by placing
  a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
  dow.




                                                                                               257
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Mobility     Breakdown assistance


Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck         Screw thread
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

xDrive




                                                       Press on the lower part of the cover. The cover
                                                       is pushed out at the top edge and can be pulled
                                                       out.
      Towing a vehicle with xDrive
      Do not tow a vehicle with xDrive with just       Tow-starting
the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the
wheels could lock up and the transfer case could       Note
be damaged.◀                                           Do not tow-start your vehicle.
                                                       Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
Tow fitting                                            cannot be started by tow-starting.
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐         Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the       edied.
front or rear of the BMW.
It is located in the tool kit under the cargo floor
cover and storage compartment in the cargo
area, refer to page 245.
It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo floor
cover in the cargo area, refer to page 245.
      Tow fitting, information on use
      ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
        the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
  only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
  do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐
hicle can occur.◀




   258
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                         Care     Mobility



Care
Vehicle equipment                                    Washing in automatic car washes
                                                     Give preference to cloth car washes or those
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                     that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
well as country-specific and special equipment
                                                     damage.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                     Notes
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This       Note the following:
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐    ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
tems.                                                  damaged by the transport mechanisms.
                                                     ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
                                                       may be damaged, depending on the width of
Car washes                                             the vehicle.
                                                     ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 60,
Notes                                                  to avoid unintentional wiper activation.
      Steam jets or high-pressure washers            ▷ Move the rear window wiper to its resting
     When using steam jets or high-pressure            position, deactivate it, and protect it against
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away          damage. Ask the car wash operator about
and use a maximum temperature of                       any necessary protective measures.
140 ℉/60 ℃.                                          ▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐
Holding them too close or using excessively            stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if
high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐          there is a risk that these may be damaged.
age or preliminary damage that may then lead to
                                                           Guide rails in car washes
long-term damage.
                                                           Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
                                                     than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
pressure washer.◀
                                                     could be damaged.◀
      Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
      pressure washers                               Before driving into a car wash
When using high-pressure washers, do not             The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park     are taken.
Distance Control or the backup camera, for in‐
stance, for extended periods of time and only        Automatic transmission
from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀            1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐      lock, even with Comfort Access.
ter.                                                 2. Engage the selector lever or transmission
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐        position N.
hicle.                                               3. Release the handbrake, refer to page 58.
                                                     4. Switch the engine off.
                                                     5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
                                                        so that the vehicle can roll.

                                                                                                259
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
           Mobility     Care


In 8-gear automatic transmissions, transmis‐         Vehicle paint
sion position P is engaged automatically.            Regular care contributes to driving safety and
▷ Automatically after approx. 30 minutes.            value retention. Environmental influences in
▷ When the remote control is removed from            areas with high air pollution or natural contami‐
  the ignition lock.                                 nants, such as tree resin or pollen, can have an
                                                     impact on the vehicle paint. Tailor the frequency
Headlamps                                            and extent of your car care to these influences.
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or          Immediately remove aggressive substances,
  caustic cleansers.                                 such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird drop‐
                                                     pings, to prevent damage to or discoloration of
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
                                                     the paintwork.
  insects, with shampoo and wash off with
  water.
                                                     Leather care
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
                                                     Remove dust from the leather often, using a
  ice scraper.
                                                     cloth or vacuum cleaner.

After washing the vehicle                            Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
                                                     chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
                                                     wear and premature degradation of the leather
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
                                                     surface.
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can
occur.                                               To guard against discoloration, such as from
                                                     clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
Fully remove an residue from the windows; oth‐
                                                     months.
erwise, streaking may occur when the wind‐
shield wipers are activated, impairing your view     Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
and causing wiper noise.                             dust and dirt are more noticeable.
                                                     Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
                                                     grease will gradually break down the protective
Vehicle care                                         layer of the leather surface.
                                                     Suitable care products are available from the
Car care products                                    service center.
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been             Upholstery material care
tested and approved.                                 Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
      Car care and cleaning products                 If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
      Follow the instructions on the container.      soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
                                                     interior cleaner.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.                                             Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
                                                     large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
                                                     terial vigorously.
cles.
                                                           Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health.◀                         Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
                                                     articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
                                                     Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀



   260
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                        Care      Mobility


Caring for special components                        grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to
                                                     surface damage.◀
Light-alloy wheels
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter    Safety belts
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly      Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets         thus have a negative impact on safety.
above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's
instructions.                                              No chemical cleaning
                                                          Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
Chrome surfaces                                      the webbing.◀
Carefully clean components such as the radiator      Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
grille or door handles with an ample supply of       belts clipped into their buckles.
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐
                                                     Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
                                                     until they are dry.
Rubber components
                                                     Carpets and floor mats
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐
ers.                                                       No objects in the area around the pedals

When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐           Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
icon-containing car care products in order to        objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.               otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
                                                     impeded while driving
Fine wood parts                                      Do not place additional floor mats over existing
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐          mats or other objects.
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft    Only use floor mats that have been approved for
cloth.                                               the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
                                                     Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
Plastic components                                   again when they are returned after being re‐
These include:                                       moved, such as for cleaning.◀
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.                        Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
▷ Headliner.                                         compartment for cleaning.
▷ Lamp lenses.                                       When returning the floor mats, secure them
▷ Instrument cluster cover.                          again to prevent slipping.

▷ Matte black spray-coated components.               If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
                                                     microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
                                                     prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
Clean with a microfiber cloth.                       in the direction of travel only.
Moisten the cloth lightly with water if necessary.
Do not soak the headliner.                           Sensors/cameras
                                                     To clean sensors or cameras, use a cloth mois‐
      Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
                                                     tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
      or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty

                                                                                                261
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
            Mobility       Care


Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an anti-static microfiber
cloth.
       Cleaning displays
       Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀

Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.




   262
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                               Care   Mobility




                                                                 263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                   Reference
                               This chapter contains technical data, short
                         commands for the voice activation system, and an
                         index that will quickly take you to the information
                                                                   you need.




Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Reference     Technical data



Technical data
Vehicle equipment                                  describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                   your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as     special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment     also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also   tems.



Dimensions




1   Vehicle width, without exterior mirrors:       3   Vehicle width, with exterior mirrors: 81 in‐
    70.8 inches/1,798 mm                               ches/2,058 mm
2   Vehicle height: 60.8 inches/1,545 mm           4   Wheelbase: 108.7 inches/2,760 mm
                                                   5   Vehicle length: 176.5 inches/4,484 mm



    266
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                                 Technical data      Reference



6   Tailgate opening height: 80.0 inches/
    2,031 mm


Smallest turning circle dia.: 37 ft/11.3 m, with       Height with roof antenna: 62 in/1,573 mm
xDrive: 38.7 ft/11.8 m.



Weights

                                                   X1 sDrive28i       X1 xDrive28i     X1 xDrive35i

Approved gross vehicle          lbs/kg             4,497/2,040        4,707/2,135      4,861/2,205
weight

Load                            lbs/kg             904/410            904/410          904/410

Approved front axle load        lbs/kg             2,116/960          2,326/1,055      2,425/1,100

Approved rear axle load         lbs/kg             2,546/1,155        2,590/1,175      2,646/1,200

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg                 165/75             165/75           165/75

Cargo area capacity             cu ft/liter        25.0-56.0/420‐     25.0-56.0/420‐   25.0-56.0/420-
                                                   1,350              1,350            1,350



Capacities

                                                                           Notes

Fuel tank                                                                  Fuel specifications, refer to
                                                                           page 226

X1 sDrive28i                    US gal/liters         approx. 16.1/61

X1 xDrive28i, X1 xDrive35i      US gal/liters         approx. 16.6/63

Window washer system            US qt/liters          approx. 6.3/6        Details, refer to page 61
With headlamp washer sys‐
tem




                                                                                                 267
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Reference      Short commands for voice activation system



Short commands for voice activation
system
Vehicle equipment                                    To have the available spoken instructions read
                                                     out loud: ›Voice commands‹
This chapter describes all series equipment as
                                                     The following short commands apply to vehicles
well as country-specific and special equipment
                                                     equipped with a voice activation system. They
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
                                                     have no function in vehicles in which only the
describes equipment that may not be found in
                                                     mobile phone is operated using the voice.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.



General information
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 25.



Adjusting
Vehicle

Function                                                     Command

Opens the main menu.                                         ›Main menu‹

Open the options.                                            ›Options‹

Open the settings.                                           ›Settings‹

Settings on the Control Display.                             ›Control display‹

Open the time and date.                                      ›Time and date‹

Open the language and units.                                 ›Language and units‹

Open the speed limit.                                        ›Speed‹

Open the light.                                              ›Lighting‹

Open the door lock.                                          ›Door locks‹




   268
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                           Short commands for voice activation system           Reference



Vehicle information
Computer

Function                                                     Command

Open the computer.                                           ›Onboard info‹

Open the trip computer.                                      ›Trip computer‹


Vehicle

Function                                                     Command

Open the vehicle information.                                ›Vehicle info‹

Open the vehicle status.                                     ›Vehicle status‹



Navigation
General information

Function                                                     Command

Navigation menu.                                             ›Navigation‹

Open the destination entry.                                  ›Enter address‹

Enter the address.                                           ›Enter address‹

Enter the town/city.                                         ›City‹

Enter the country.                                           ›State‹

Enter the postal code.                                       ›Postal Code‹

Open destination guidance.                                   ›Guidance‹

Start destination guidance.                                  ›Start guidance‹

Terminate destination guidance.                              ›Stop guidance‹

Open the home address.                                       ›Home address‹

Open the route criteria.                                     ›Route preference‹

Open the route.                                              ›Route information‹

Switch on the spoken instruction.                            ›Switch on voice instructions‹




                                                                                              269
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
        Reference       Short commands for voice activation system



Function                                                     Command

Repeat the spoken instruction.                               ›Repeat voice instructions‹

Switch off the spoken instruction.                           ›Switch off voice instructions‹

Display the address book.                                    ›Address book‹

Display the most recent destinations.                        ›Last destinations‹

Open the traffic bulletins.                                  ›Traffic Info‹

Special destinations.                                        ›Points of interest‹


Map

Function                                                     Command

Display the map.                                             ›Map‹

Map facing north.                                            ›Map facing north‹

Map facing the direction of travel.                          ›Map in direction of travel‹

Perspective map.                                             ›Map perspective view‹

Automatic scaling of the map.                                ›Map with automatic scaling‹

Scale...feet.                                                ›Map scale ... feet‹

Scale...meters.                                              ›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale
                                                             100 meters

Scale...kilometers.                                          ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map
                                                             scale 5 kilometers

Scale...miles.                                               ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale
                                                             5 miles


Split screen settings

Function                                                     Command

Split screen.                                                ›Switch on splitscreen‹

Switch off the split screen.                                 ›Turn off split screen‹

Adjust the split screen.                                     ›Split screen content‹

Split screen, map facing north.                              ›Split screen map facing north‹

Split screen, current position.                              ›Split screen current position‹




  270
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                             Short commands for voice activation system           Reference



Function                                                     Command

Split screen, facing the direction of travel.                ›Split screen map in direction of
                                                             travel‹

Split screen, perspective.                                   ›Split screen perspective‹

Split screen, expanded intersection zoom.                    ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹

Split screen scale...feet.                                   ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split
                                                             screen scale 100 feet

Split screen scale...meters.                                 ›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g., split
                                                             screen scale 100 meters

Split screen scale...kilometers.                             ›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g.,
                                                             split screen scale 5 kilometers

Split screen scale...miles.                                  ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split
                                                             screen scale 5 miles

Split screen, highlight the traffic situation.               ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹

Split screen, computer.                                      ›Split screen on board info‹

Split screen, trip computer.                                 ›Splitscreen trip computer‹

Split screen, scale automatically.                           ›Split screen automatic scaling‹


Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function                                                     Command

Enter a new destination.                                     ›Enter address‹

Trip list.                                                   ›Stored trips‹



Radio
FM

Function                                                     Command

Open a frequency.                                            ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,
                                                             93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5

Open the radio.                                              ›Radio‹

Open the FM stations.                                        ›F M‹




                                                                                                 271
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
        Reference       Short commands for voice activation system



Function                                                      Command

Open the manual search.                                       ›Manual‹

Select a frequency range.                                     ›Select frequency‹

Open a station.                                               ›Select station‹


AM

Function                                                      Command

Open a frequency.                                             ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐
                                                              quency 753 or 753 kilohertz

Open the AM stations.                                         ›A M‹

Open the manual search.                                       ›Manual‹


Satellite radio

Function                                                      Command

Open the satellite radio.                                     ›Satellite radio‹

Switch on the satellite radio.                                ›Satellite radio on‹

Select a satellite radio channel.                             ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite
                                                              radio channel 2


Stored stations

Function                                                      Command

Open the stored stations.                                     ›Presets‹

Choose a stored station.                                      ›Select preset‹

Select a stored station.                                      ›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2




  272
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                         Short commands for voice activation system             Reference



CD/multimedia
CD/DVD drive

Function                                                   Command

Select a track.                                            ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5
                                                           or
                                                           ›C D track ...‹ e. g., CD track 5

Play back a CD.                                            ›C D on‹

Select a CD.                                               ›Select C D‹

Select a CD and track.                                     ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5

Open the CD and Multimedia menu.                           ›C D and multimedia‹

CD and DVD.                                                ›C D‹

Select a DVD.                                              ›D V D ...‹ e.g., DVD 3

Display the entertainment details on a split screen.       ›Entertainment details‹


Music collection

Function                                                   Command

Search for music, open a menu.                             ›Music search‹

Open the current playback.                                 ›Current playback‹

Open the music collection.                                 ›Music collection‹

Play back the music collection.                            ›Music collection on‹

Play back the most frequently played tracks.               ›Top fifty‹


External devices

Function                                                   Command

Open the external devices.                                 ›External devices‹

Open the Bluetooth devices.                                ›Bluetooth‹




                                                                                               273
                     Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
        Reference         Short commands for voice activation system


Tone

Function                                                     Command

Open the tone settings.                                      ›Tone‹



Telephone

Function                                                     Command

Dial a phone number.                                         ›Dial number‹

Open the Telephone menu.                                     ›Telephone‹

Display the phone book.                                      ›Phonebook‹

Redialing.                                                   ›Redial‹

Display received calls.                                      ›Received calls‹

List of messages.                                            ›Messages‹

Open the Bluetooth devices.                                  ›Bluetooth‹



Office

Function                                                     Command

Open the Office menu.                                        ›Office‹

Display Office Today.                                        ›Current office‹

Display the contacts.                                        ›Contacts‹

Display the messages.                                        ›Messages‹

Display the calendar.                                        ›Calendar‹

Display the tasks.                                           ›Tasks‹

Display the reminders.                                       ›Reminders‹




  274
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                        Short commands for voice activation system             Reference



Contacts

Function                                                   Command

Select a name.                                             ›Choose name‹

My contacts.                                               ›My contacts‹

Open the contacts.                                         ›Contacts‹

New contact.                                               ›New contact‹



ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist

Function                                                   Command

Open BMW Assist.                                           ›B M W Assist‹

Open ConnectedDrive.                                       ›Connected Drive‹

Open BMW Online.                                           ›B M W Online‹




                                                                                           275
                     Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Reference        Everything from A to Z



Everything from A to Z
Index
A                                    Alarm system 38                   Assistance with driving off, re‐
                                     Alarm system                       fer to Drive-off assistant 97
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐             – Avoiding unintentional          Assistance with starting en‐
 tem 94                                alarms 39                        gine, refer to Jump-start‐
Accident, refer to Emergency         – Ending an alarm 39               ing 255
 Request, initiating 253             – Interior motion sensor 39       Audio device, external 121
                                     – Tilt alarm sensor 39
Acoustic signal, refer to Check                                        Audio playback 171
                                     All around the headliner 17
 Control 77                                                            Audio playback, Blue‐
                                     ALL program 107
Activated charcoal filter with                                          tooth 185
                                     All-season tires, refer to Win‐
 automatic climate con‐                                                Automatic
                                      ter tires 236                    – Air distribution 106
 trol 108
                                     All-wheel drive, refer to         – Air flow rate 106
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
                                      xDrive 96                        Automatic car wash 259
 Brake force display 93
                                     Alternating-code hand-held        Automatic climate control
Adaptive light control 81
                                      transmitter 111                  – Automatic air distribu‐
Additional telephone 192
                                     AM/FM station 162                   tion 106
Additives, coolant 242
                                     Announcement, navigation,         Automatic, cruise control 98
Additives, engine oil 241
                                      refer to Spoken instruc‐         Automatic Curb Monitor 48
After washing vehicle 260
                                      tions 151                        Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Airbags 85
                                     Antifreeze, coolant 242            Function 56
Airbags, indicator/warning
                                     Antifreeze, washer fluid 61       Automatic headlamp con‐
 light 88
                                     Antilock Brake System,             trol 80, 81
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
                                      ABS 94                           Automatic recirculated air
 culated air mode 107
                                     Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐    control 107
Air conditioning mode
– Automatic climate con‐              namic Stability Control          Automatic transmission with
  trol 105                            DSC 94                            Steptronic 62, 64
– Ventilation 108                    Anti-theft protection 32          Automatic transmission with
Air distribution                     Appointments 209                  Steptronic
– Automatic 106                      Approved axle loads, refer to     – Interlock 62
– Manual 106                          Weights 267                      – Kickdown 63, 64
Air drying, refer to Cooling         Approved engine oils 241          – Overriding selector lever
 function 107                                                            lock 64
                                     Approved gross vehicle
Air flow rate 106                                                      AUTO program with automatic
                                      weight, refer to Weights 267
Airing, refer to Ventilation 108                                        climate control 106
                                     Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
Air pressure, refer to Tire infla‐                                     AUX-IN port 121, 181
                                      rest 120
 tion pressure 228                                                     Average fuel consumption 70
                                     Arrival time, refer to Com‐
Air supply                                                             Average fuel consumption
                                      puter 70
– Automatic climate con‐                                               – Setting the units 72
                                     Ashtray 114
  trol 105                                                             Average speed 70
                                     Assist 215
– Ventilation 108                                                      Average speed, refer to Com‐
                                     Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
Air vents                                                               puter 70
                                      tance 254
– Refer to Ventilation 108


   276
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                    Everything from A to Z       Reference


Axle loads, refer to               BMW Apps 219                        Button for starting the engine,
 Weights 267                       BMW Apps, video play‐                refer to Start/Stop button 54
                                    back 184
B                                  BMW Assist 215                      C
                                   BMW Assist, refer to Connec‐
Backrest curvature, refer to        tedDrive 215                       Calendar 209
 Lumbar support 44                 BMW EfficientDynamics, refer        California Proposition 65
Backrests, refer to Seats 43        to Saving fuel 133                  Warning 7
Backrest width adjustment 44       BMW Homepage 6                      Camera, care 261
Back seats                         BMW Internet page 6                 Camera, refer to Backup cam‐
– Adjusting the backrest           BMW maintenance sys‐                 era 102
  tilt 115                          tem 243                            Can holder, refer to Cu‐
Backup camera 102                  BMW Online 217                       pholder 122
Backup camera, cleaning 104        Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐         Car battery, refer to Vehicle
Backup camera, obstacle             pholder 122                         battery 251
 marking 103                       Brake assistant 94                  Car care products 260
Backup camera, pathway             Brake discs, breaking in 126        Care 259
 lines 103                         Brake fluid, refer to Service re‐   Care, displays 262
Backup camera, turning              quirements 75                      Care, vehicle 260
 lines 103                         Brake force display 93              Cargo 130
Backup lamps, bulb replace‐        Brake force distribution, elec‐     Cargo area 115
 ment 249                           tronic 94                          Cargo area
Balance 160                        Brake lamps                         – Comfort Access 37
Band-aids, refer to First aid      – Bulb replacement 249              – Cover 115
 kit 254                           Brake lamps, brake force dis‐       – Folding up the cargo floor
Bass 160                            play 93                              panel 118
Battery                            Brake lights, adaptive 93           – Multi-function hook 118
– Remote control 30                Brake pads, breaking in 126         – Partition net 116
Battery disposal 251               Brakes                              Cargo area, capacities 267
Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐     – Handbrake 58                      Cargo area, enlarging 115
 tery 251                          Brakes, BMW maintenance             Cargo area lamp, refer to Inte‐
Battery replacement, remote         system 243                          rior lamps 84
 control for vehicle 38            Brakes, service require‐            Cargo area lid, refer to Tail‐
Before entering the car             ments 75                            gate 35
 wash 259                          Brake system, BMW mainte‐           Cargo area net, refer to Parti‐
Belts, refer to Safety belts 45     nance system 243                    tion net 116
Belt tensioners, refer to Safety   Braking, notes 127                  Cargo area, opening from the
 belts 45                          Breakdown assistance 254             inside 35
Beverage holder, refer to Cu‐      Breakdown, transporting the         Cargo area, opening from the
 pholder 122                        vehicle 256                         outside 36
Black and white map dis‐           Breaking in 126                     Cargo floor panel
 play 154                          Brightness on the Control Dis‐      – Folding up 118
Blower, refer to Air flow           play 75                            Cargo floor panel, raising 118
 rate 106                          Bulb replacement, refer to          Cargo straps, securing
Bluetooth audio 185                 Lamp and bulb replace‐              cargo 131
Bluetooth connection, activat‐      ment 246                           Car key, refer to Integrated
 ing/deactivating 193                                                   key/remote control 30


                                                                                              277
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Reference      Everything from A to Z


Carpet, care 261                   Child restraint fixing sys‐         Compartments, refer to Stor‐
Car phone, installation loca‐       tems 50                             age compartments 120, 121
 tion, refer to Center arm‐        Child restraint fixing systems,     Compass, digital 112
 rest 120                           mounting 50                        Computer 70
Car phone, refer to Tele‐          Child safety locks 53               Computer, displaying informa‐
 phone 192                         Child seat, mounting 50              tion 70
Car vacuum cleaner, connect‐       Child seats, refer to Transport‐    Computer, displays on the
 ing, refer to Connecting elec‐     ing children safely 50              Control Display 70
 trical devices 114                Chrome parts, care 261              Concierge service 216
Car wash 259                       Cigarette lighter, connecting       Condensation under the vehi‐
Catalytic converter, refer to       electrical devices 114              cle 128
 Hot exhaust system 126            Cigarette lighter, refer to         Condition Based Service
CBS Condition Based Serv‐           Lighter 114                         CBS 243
 ice 243                           Cigarette lighter socket 114        Confirmation signals for lock‐
CD/DVD 170                         Circulation of air, refer to Re‐     ing/unlocking the vehicle 33
CD/DVD notes 175                    circulated air mode 107            ConnectedDrive 215
CD changer 174                     Cleaning, displays 262              Connecting, mobile phone, re‐
CDs, storing 176                   Cleaning your BMW, refer to          fer to Pairing the mobile
Cell phone 192                      Care 259                            phone 193
Cell phone, installation loca‐     Clock 68                            Consumption, refer to Aver‐
 tion, refer to Center arm‐        Clock                                age fuel consumption 70
 rest 120                          – 12h/24h format 73                 Contacts 205, 213
Center armrest, front 120          – Setting the time and date 73      Control Display 18
Center armrest, rear 121           Closing                             Control Display, care 262
Center brake lamp, bulb re‐        – From the inside 34                Control Display, settings 74
                                   – From the outside 32
 placement 250                                                         Controller 19
                                   Clothes hooks 122
Center console, refer to                                               Controls and displays 12
                                   Cockpit 12
 Around the center con‐                                                Control systems, driving sta‐
                                   Cold start, refer to Starting the
 sole 16                                                                bility 94
                                    engine 55
Central locking                                                        Convenient operation
– Comfort Access 36                Combination instrument, refer       – Glass sunroof 32
– From the inside 34                to Instrument cluster 14           – Window 32
– Setting the unlocking char‐      Combination switch, refer to        Coolant 242
  acteristics 32                    Turn signal/high beams/            Coolant, checking the
Central locking system              headlamp flasher 59                 level 242
– From the outside 31              Combination switch, refer to        Coolant temperature 69
– Principle 31                      Washer/wiper system 59             Cooling function, switching on
Central screen, refer to Control   Comfort Access                       and off 107
 Display 18                        – Battery replacement 38            Cooling, maximum 106
Changes, technical, refer to       Comfort area, refer to Around       Cooling system, refer to Cool‐
 Safety 6                           the center console 16               ant 242
Changing wheels/tires 235          Compact wheel, inflation pres‐      Corrosion on brake discs 128
Check Control 77                    sure 228                           Courtesy lamps, refer to Inte‐
Children, transporting 50          Compartment for remote con‐          rior lamps 84
Child restraint fixing system       trol, refer to Ignition lock 54    Cradle for telephone or mobile
 LATCH 51                          Compartment in floor 118             phone, refer to Snap-in
                                                                        adapter 202

   278
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                     Everything from A to Z      Reference


Cruise control 98                    Disposal, vehicle battery 251     E
Cruise control                       Distance warning, refer to Park
– Malfunction 99                      Distance Control PDC 100         ECO PRO 134
Cupholder 122                        Divided rear seat backrest, re‐   ECO PRO display 134
Curb weight, refer to                 fer to Enlarging the cargo       ECO PRO driving mode 134
 Weights 267                          area 115                         ECO PRO mode 134
Current fuel consumption 69          Divided screen view, split        EfficientDynamics, refer to
Current location, storing 142         screen 22                         Saving fuel 133
Curve lights, refer to Adaptive      Door key, refer to Remote con‐    Electrical malfunction
 light control 81                     trol with integrated key 30      – Door lock 34
                                     Door lock 34                      – Driver's door 34
D                                    Doors, manual operation 34        – Fuel filler flap 225
                                     Doors, unlocking and locking      – Tailgate 36
Dashboard lighting, refer to In‐     – Confirmation signals 33         Electric seat adjustment 44
 strument lighting 83                – From the inside 34              Electronic brake-force distri‐
Dashboard, refer to Cock‐            – From the outside 32              bution 94
 pit 12                              DOT Quality Grades 233            Electronic engine oil level
Data, technical 266                  Downhill control 96                check 239
Date                                 Draft-free ventilation 108        Electronic Stability Program
– Date format 74                     Drive-off assistant 97             ESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil‐
– Setting 73                         Driving away on inclines, refer    ity Control DSC 94
Daytime running lights 81             to Drive-off assistant 97        Emergency activation
Daytime running lights, bulb         Driving notes, breaking in 126    – Automatic transmission, re‐
 replacement 248                     Driving notes, general 126          fer to Overriding selector
Defroster                            Driving on poor roads 128           lever lock 64
– Rear window 107                                                      Emergency operation
                                     Driving stability control sys‐
Destination entry via the ad‐                                          – Door lock, refer to Manual
                                      tems 94
 dress book 142                                                          operation 34
                                     Driving through water 127
Destination guidance 149                                               Emergency operation, fuel
                                     Driving tips, refer to Driving
Destination guidance with in‐                                           filler flap, unlocking man‐
                                      notes 126
 termediate destinations 147                                            ually 225
                                     Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐
Destination input, naviga‐                                             Emergency Request 253
                                      tion 107
 tion 140                                                              Emergency service, refer to
                                     DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
Digital clock 68                                                        Roadside Assistance 254
                                      trol 94
Digital compass 112                                                    Energy-conscious driving, re‐
                                     DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
Digital radio 163                                                       fer to Current fuel consump‐
                                      trol 95
Dimming mirrors 49                                                      tion 69
                                     DTMF suffix dialing 198           Energy, saving
Directional indicators, refer to     DVD/CD 170                        – Automatic Engine Start/Stop
 Turn signals 59                     DVDs, storing 176                   Function 56
Display lighting, refer to Instru‐   DVD, video 172                    Energy, saving, refer to Saving
 ment lighting 83                    Dynamic destination guid‐          fuel 133
Displays and controls 12              ance 156                         Engine, breaking in 126
Displays, care 262                   Dynamic Stability Control         Engine compartment 238
Displays, cleaning 262                DSC 94                           Engine coolant, refer to Cool‐
Displays, refer to Instrument        Dynamic Traction Control           ant 242
 cluster 14                           DTC 95                           Engine oil, adding 241
Disposal, coolant 242


                                                                                              279
                        Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Reference      Everything from A to Z


Engine oil, additives, refer to    Exterior mirrors, folding in and   Flooding, refer to Driving
 Approved engine oils 241           out 48                             through water 127
Engine oil, alternative oil        External audio device 121          Floor carpet, care 261
 types 241                         External devices 181               Floor mats, care 261
Engine oil, BMW maintenance        External temperature dis‐          FM/AM station 162
 system 243                         play 68                           Fog lamps 83
Engine oil change intervals, re‐   External temperature display       Fog lamps, indicator lamp 83
 fer to Service require‐           – Changing the unit of meas‐       Foldable rear seat back‐
 ments 75                            ure 72                            rest 115
Engine oil, checking the           – On computer 72                   Foot brake 127
 level 239                         External temperature warn‐         Footwell lamps, refer to Inte‐
Engine oil, filling capacity 267    ing 68                             rior lamps 84
Engine oil temperature 69          Externel temperature dis‐          For your own safety 6
Engine oil types, alterna‐          play 68                           Four-wheel drive, refer to
 tive 241                          Eyes for securing cargo 131         xDrive 96
Engine oil types, ap‐                                                 Front airbags 85
 proved 241                        F                                  Front fog lamps 83
Engine, overheating, refer to                                         FTM Flat Tire Monitor 88
 Coolant temperature 69            Fader 160                          Fuel 226
Engine start, assistance 255       Failure messages, refer to         Fuel
Engine, starting 55                 Check Control 77                  – Refer to Average fuel con‐
Engine, starting                   False alarm                          sumption 70
– Comfort Access 36                – Avoiding unintentional           Fuel, additives 226
Engine, starting, Start/Stop         alarms 39                        Fuel, average consump‐
                                   – Ending an alarm 39                tion 70
 button 54
                                   Fastening safety belts, refer to   Fuel cap 224
Engine, stopping, Start/Stop
                                    Safety belts 45                   Fuel cap, closing 224
 button 54
                                   Fault messages, refer to           Fuel consumption display
Engine, switching off 55
                                    Check Control 77                  – Average fuel consump‐
Entry lamps, refer to Interior
                                   Filling capacities 267               tion 70
 lamps 84
                                   Filter                             Fuel consumption display,
Environmentally friendly driv‐
                                   – Refer to Microfilter/acti‐        current fuel consumption 69
 ing, refer to Current fuel con‐     vated-charcoal filter with au‐
 sumption 69                                                          Fuel-efficient driving, refer to
                                     tomatic climate control 108
Equalizer 160                                                          Current fuel consumption 69
                                   Fine wood, care 261
Equipment, interior 110                                               Fuel filler flap, closing 224
                                   First aid kit 254
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐                                         Fuel filler flap, opening 224
                                   Fitting for towing 258
 gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐                                          Fuel filler flap, unlocking in
                                   Flashing when locking/unlock‐
 bility Control DSC 94                                                 case of an electrical malfunc‐
                                    ing 33
Exchanging wheels/tires 235                                            tion 225
                                   Flat Tire Monitor FTM 88
Exhaust system 126                                                    Fuel gauge 69
                                   Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow
Exterior mirrors 48                                                   Fuel, saving 133
                                    chains 237
Exterior mirrors, adjusting 48                                        Fuel tank capacity, refer to Fill‐
                                   Flat tire, run-flat tires 236
Exterior mirrors, automatic                                            ing capacities 267
                                   Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
 dimming 49                                                           Fuel tank contents, refer to
                                    TPM 90
Exterior mirrors, automatic                                            Filling capacities 267
                                   Flat tire, warning lamp 89, 91
 heating 49                                                           Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐
                                   Flat tire, wheel change 250
                                                                       pacities 267


   280
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                    Everything from A to Z        Reference


Fuse 252                          HDC Hill Descent Control 96          Hills 128
                                  HD Radio 163                         Holder for beverages 122
G                                 Head airbags 85                      Holder for remote control, re‐
                                  Headlamp control, auto‐               fer to Ignition lock 54
Garage door opener, refer to       matic 80, 81                        Homepage 6
 Universal Garage Door            Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐         Hood 238
 Opener 110                        ture 81                             Hood, opening 238
Gasoline 226                      Headlamp cover, remov‐               Horn 12
Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel      ing 247                             Hot exhaust system 126
 gauge 69                         Headlamp flasher 59, 82              Hotline 218
Gasoline quality 226              Headlamp flasher, indicator          House number, entering for
Gas station recommenda‐            lamp 15                              navigation 141
 tion 151                         Headlamps 80                         Hydraulic brake assistant 94
Gear change                       Headlamps                            Hydroplaning 127
– Automatic transmission with     – Bulb replacement 247
  Steptronic 62                   Headlamps, care 260                  I
Gear change, automatic trans‐     Headlamps, cleaning 60
 mission with Steptronic 66       Headlamps, cleaning, washer          Ice warning, refer to External
Gear change, via shift pad‐        fluid 62                              temperature warning 68
 dles 66                          Headliner 17                         Icy roads, refer to External
Gear display, automatic trans‐    Head restraints 46                     temperature warning 68
 mission with Steptronic 62       Head restraints                      Identification marks, tires 233
General driving notes 126         – Adjusting the height 46            Identification number, refer to
Glass sunroof, electric           – Removing 47                          Engine compartment 238
– Convenient operation 32         Heating
                                                                       iDrive 18
– Remote control 32               – Rear window 107
                                                                       iDrive
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐    – Seats 45
                                                                       – Changing settings 74
 amic glass sunroof 41            Heating, mirrors 49
                                                                       – Changing the date and
Glove compartment 120             Heavy cargo, refer to Stowing           time 73
Glove compartment                  cargo 131                           – Changing the language 74
– USB interface 120               Height adjustment                    – Changing the units of meas‐
Glove compartment, light‐         – Seats 43                              ure and display format 72
 ing 120                          Height, refer to Dimen‐              – Setting the brightness 75
GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐     sions 266                           Ignition 54
 gation system 138                High-beam Assistant 82               Ignition key position 1, refer to
Gross vehicle weight, refer to    High beams 82                          Radio ready state 54
 Weights 267                      High beams                           Ignition key position 2, refer to
                                  – Bulb replacement 247                 Ignition on 54
                                  High beams/low beams, auto‐
H                                                                      Ignition key, refer to Remote
                                   matic, refer to High-beam             control with integrated
Halogen headlamps                  Assistant 82                          key 30
– Bulb replacement 247            High beams, indicator                Ignition lock 54
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐      lamp 15                             Ignition, switched off 55
 nating code 111                  High-pressure washers 259            Ignition, switched on 54
Hands-free microphone 16          Hill Descent Control HDC 96          Indication of a flat tire 89, 91
Hazard warning sys‐               Hill drive-off assistant, refer to   Indicator and warning
 tem 16, 253                       Drive-off assistant 97                lamps 15


                                                                                               281
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Reference       Everything from A to Z


Inflation pressure monitor, re‐     Intersection, entering for navi‐   Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer to
  fer to Flat Tire Monitor 88         gation 141                        Safety belts 45
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire   iPod/iPhone 182                    Lashing eyes, securing
  inflation pressure 228                                                cargo 131
Information on the navigation       J                                  LATCH child restraint fixing
  data 138                                                              system 51
Initialization after power fail‐    Jacking points for the vehicle     Leather, care 260
  ure 251                            jack 251                          LEDs, light-emitting di‐
Initializing                        Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 251     odes 246
– Compass, refer to Calibrat‐       Joystick, refer to Selector        Length, refer to Dimen‐
   ing 113                           lever 65                           sions 266
– Panoramic glass sunroof 42        Jump-starting 255                  Letters and numbers, enter‐
– Refer to Setting the time and                                         ing 23
   date 73
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
                                    K                                  License plate lamp, bulb re‐
                                                                        placement 250
  FTM 88
                                    Keyless Go, refer to Comfort       Light-alloy wheels, care 261
Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon‐
                                     Access 36                         Light-emitting diodes,
  itor TPM 91
                                    Keyless opening and closing,        LEDs 246
Inside brake lamps
                                     refer to Comfort Access 36        Lighter 114
– Bulb replacement 250
                                    Key Memory, refer to Personal      Lighting
Installation location, tele‐
                                     Profile 30                        – Instruments 83
  phone 120
                                    Key, refer to Integrated key/re‐   – Lamp and bulb replace‐
Instrument cluster 14                                                    ment 246
                                     mote control 30
Instrument lighting 83                                                 Lighting, vehicle, refer to
                                    Kickdown
Instrument panel, refer to In‐                                          Lamps 80
                                    – Automatic transmission with
  strument cluster 14                                                  Light switch 80
                                      Steptronic 63, 64
Instruments, refer to Cock‐         Knee airbag 85                     Limit, refer to Speed limit 78
  pit 12                            Knocking control 226               Load 130
Integrated key 30                                                      Loading 130
Interactive map 145
Interior equipment 110
                                    L                                  Lock buttons, doors, refer to
                                                                        Locking 35
Interior lamps 84                   Label, run-flat tire 236           Locking
Interior lamps                                                         – From the inside 35
                                    Lamp and bulb replacement,
– Remote control 32                                                    – From the outside 32
                                     lamp replacement 246
Interior mirror 49                                                     – Setting the confirmation sig‐
                                    Lamps 80
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐                                          nals 33
                                    Lamps, automatic headlamp
  matic dimming 49                                                     – Without remote control, refer
                                     control 80, 81
Interior rearview mirror, com‐                                           to Comfort Access 36
                                    Lamps, High-beam Assis‐            Locking the vehicle
  pass 112
                                     tant 82                           – From the inside 34
Interior temperature, setting
– Automatic climate con‐            Lamps, parking lamps/low           – From the outside 32
   trol 105                          beams 80                          Locks, doors, and win‐
Interlock, refer to Disengaging     Lamps, replacing, refer to          dows 53
  the remote control 62              Lamp and bulb replace‐            Longlife oils, alternative oil
Intermediate destinations 147        ment 246                           types 241
Internet page 6                     Language, changing on the          Longlife oils, refer to Approved
                                     Control Display 74                 engine oils 241



   282
                            Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                  Everything from A to Z      Reference


Low beams 80                      Map display in black and          Mounting of child restraint fix‐
Low beams                          white 154                         ing systems 50
– Automatic 81                    Map in split screen 153           MP3 player 181
– Bulb replacement 247            Map view 151                      Multimedia 170
Low beams, automatic 80           Marking on approved               Music collection 176
Low beams, automatic, refer to     tires 236                        Music search 178
 High-beam Assistant 82           Master key, refer to Remote       Music, storing 176
Lower back support, refer to       control with integrated
 Lumbar support 44                 key 30                           N
Luggage rack                      Maximum cooling 106
– Rear luggage rack 132           Maximum speed, winter             Navigation 138
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-       tires 236                        Navigation data 138
 mounted luggage rack 132         Medical kit, refer to First aid   Navigation data, updating 138
Lumbar support 44                  kit 254                          Navigation system
                                  Memory, refer to Seat and mir‐    – Destination entry by
M                                  ror memory 47                      voice 146
                                  Menus, operating, iDrive 18       Neck restraints, refer to Head
Main inspection, refer to Serv‐   Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐     restraints 46
 ice requirements 75               ing concept 19                   Nets, refer to Storage com‐
Maintenance 243                   Message list, traffic bulle‐       partments 121
Maintenance, refer to Service      tins 153                         New wheels and tires 235
 booklet                          Messages 207                      Notes 6, 210
Maintenance, refer to Service     Microfilter                       Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐
 requirements 75                  – With automatic climate con‐      tion 108
Maintenance require‐                trol 108
 ments 243                        Minimum tread, tires 234          O
Maintenance system                Mirror
 BMW 243                          – Mirror memory, refer to Seat    OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
Malfunction                         and mirror memory 47             tics 244
– Automatic transmission with     Mirrors 48                        OBD socket, refer to Socket
  Steptronic 64                   Mirrors                            for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
– Door lock 34                    – Automatic Curb Monitor 48        sis 244
– Fuel filler flap 225            Mirrors, folding in and out 48    Octane number, refer to Fuel
– Tailgate 36                     Mirrors, heating 49                quality 226
Malfunction warnings, refer to    Mirrors, interior mirror 49       Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐
 Check Control 77                 Mobile communication devi‐         line quality 226
Manual air distribution 106        ces in the vehicle 127           Odometer 68
Manual mode, automatic            Mobile phone, installation lo‐    Office 204
 transmission with Step‐           cation, refer to Center arm‐     Oil additives 241
 tronic 63, 66                     rest 120
Manual operation                                                    Oil consumption 239
                                  Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐      Oil level 239
– Door lock 34                     phone 192
– Driver's door 34                                                  Oil, refer to Engine oil 239
                                  Modifications, technical, refer   Oil types, alternative 241
– Selector lever lock, auto‐
                                   to Safety 6                      Oil types, approved 241
  matic transmission 64
                                  Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐    Old batteries, disposal 251
Manual operation, fuel filler
                                   play 18                          Onboard Diagnostics
 flap 225
Map, destination entry 145                                           OBD 244

                                                                                            283
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Reference     Everything from A to Z


Onboard monitor, refer to          Passenger side mirror, tilt‐       R
 Control Display 18                 ing 48
Onboard vehicle tool kit 245       PDC Park Distance Con‐             Radiator fluid, refer to Cool‐
Opening and closing                 trol 100                           ant 242
– Comfort Access 36                Performance Control 96             Radio-operated key, refer to
– From the inside 34               Personal information 204            Remote control with
– From the outside 32              Personal Profile 30                 integrated key 30
– Using the door lock 34           Pinch protection                   Radio ready state 54
– Using the remote control 32      – Panoramic glass sunroof 42       Radio ready state, switched
Operating concept, iDrive 18       – Windows 40                        off 55
Outside-air mode                   Plastic, care 261                  Radio ready state, switched
– Automatic climate con‐           PlugIn 220
  trol 107                                                             on 54
                                   Pollen                             Radio setting, refer to Radio
Outside air, refer to Recircu‐     – Refer to Microfilter/acti‐
 lated air mode 107                                                    ready state 54
                                     vated-charcoal filter with au‐
Overheating of engine, refer to                                       Rain sensor 60
                                     tomatic climate control 108
 Coolant temperature 69                                               Random 171
                                   Poor road operation 128
                                                                      Random playback 171
                                   Position, storing 142
                                                                      Range 70
P                                  Postal code, entering in navi‐
                                                                      RDS 163
                                    gation 141
Paint, vehicle 260                                                    Reading lamps 84
                                   Power windows
Pairing, mobile phone 193          – Safety switch 41                 Reading out loud 211
Panic mode 33                      Power windows, opening and         Rear lamps, refer to Tail
Panoramic glass sunroof             closing 40                         lamps 249
– Convenient operation 32          Power windows, refer to Win‐       Rear seat backrest
– Initializing 42                                                     – Foldable 115
                                    dows 40
– Opening, closing 41                                                 Rear seats
                                   Prescribed engine oils, refer to
– Pinch protection 42                                                 – Adjusting the backrest
                                    Approved engine oils 241            tilt 115
– Power failure 42
                                   Pressure, tires 228                – Adjusting the head re‐
– Remote control 32
                                   Pressure warning, tires 88           straints 47
– Tilting 41
                                   Profile depth, refer to Mini‐      – Folding down 115
Park Distance Control
                                    mum tread depth 234               – Folding down the back‐
 PDC 100
                                   Profile, tires 234                   rests 115
Parked-car ventilation 108
                                   Programmable memory but‐           Rear socket 114
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
                                    tons, iDrive 23                   Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐
 tion 128
                                   Protection function, refer to       rors 48
Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐
                                   Pinch protection                   Rear window defroster 107
 tance Control PDC 100
                                   – Panoramic glass sunroof 42       Rear window, washing 61
Parking assistant, refer to Park   Protective function, refer to      Rear window wiper 61
 Distance Control PDC 100          Pinch protection                   Recirculated air mode 107
Parking brake, refer to Hand‐      – Windows 40                       Recommended tire
 brake 58                          Push-and-turn switch, refer to      brands 236
Parking lamps 80                    Controller 19                     Redialing 199
Parking lamps/low beams 80
                                                                      Refueling 224
Parking lamps, bulb replace‐
                                                                      Remaining distance to desti‐
 ment 248
                                                                       nation, refer to Computer 70
Passenger airbags, deactivat‐
 ing 86


    284
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                  Everything from A to Z       Reference


Remaining range for service,      RON, refer to Fuel quality 226     Seat adjustment
 refer to Service require‐        Roof load capacity 267             – Manual 43
 ments 75                         Roof-mounted luggage               Seat adjustment, electric 44
Remaining range, refer to          rack 132                          Seat and mirror memory 47
 Range 70                         Rope, refer to Towing 257          Seat belts
Reminders 211                     Route 150                          – Refer to Safety belts 45
Remote control                    Route criteria, route 149          Seat heating 45
– Battery replacement 38          Route, displaying 150              Seats
– Comfort Access 36                                                  – Adjusting 43
                                  Route section, bypassing 150
– Garage door opener 110                                             – Adjusting electrically 44
                                  RSC Runflat System Compo‐
– Malfunction 33, 38                                                 – Heating 45
                                   nent, refer to Run-flat           – Memory, refer to Seat and
– Tailgate 33
                                   tires 236                           mirror memory 47
– Universal 110
                                  Rubber components,                 – Sitting safely 43
Remote control, removing
                                   care 261                          – Storing the setting, refer to
 from the ignition lock 54
                                  Run-flat tires 236                   Seat and mirror memory 47
Remote control, service
                                  Run-flat tires, tire inflation     Selector lever, automatic
 data 243
                                   pressure 228                       transmission with Step‐
Remote inquiry 198
                                  Running lights, refer to Parking    tronic 62, 65
Replacement fuse 252
                                   lamps/low beams 80                Selector lever lock, overrid‐
Replacement remote con‐
                                                                      ing 64
 trol 30
Replacing wheels/tires 235        S                                  Selector lever lock, refer to
                                                                      Changing selector lever po‐
Reporting safety defects 8
                                  Safe braking 127                    sitions, Shiftlock 62
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
                                  Safety 6                           Selector lever lock, releas‐
 gauge 69
                                  Safety belts 45                     ing 65
Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐
                                  Safety belts                       Selector lever positions, auto‐
 fer to Washer fluid reser‐
                                  – Damage 46                         matic transmission with
 voir 62                          Safety belts, care 261              Steptronic 62
Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon‐     Safety belts, indicator/warning    Sensors, care 261
 itor TPM 91                       lamp 46                           Service and warranty 7
Restraining systems
                                  Safety belts, reminder 46          Service data in the remote
– Refer to Safety belts 45
                                  Safety switch for rear win‐         control 243
Restraint systems for chil‐
                                   dows 41                           Service interval display, refer
 dren 50
                                  Safety systems                      to Condition Based Service
Retaining straps, securing
                                  – Safety belts 45                   CBS 243
 cargo 131                        Safety systems, airbags 85
Retreaded tires 236                                                  Service interval display, refer
                                  Safety tires, refer to Run-flat     to Service requirements 75
Reverse gear
                                   tires 236                         Service requirements 75
– Automatic transmission with
                                  Satellite radio 164                Service requirements, CBS
  Steptronic 63
                                  Saving fuel 133                     Condition Based Serv‐
Road, avoiding 149
                                  Scale, changing during navi‐        ice 243
Road detour 149
                                   gation 152                        Service, Roadside Assis‐
Roadside Assistance 216
Roadside parking lamp             Screen, refer to Control Dis‐       tance 254
– Bulb replacement 248             play 18                           Servotronic 97
Roadside parking lamps 82         Search, refer to BMW On‐
RON gasoline quality 226           line 217



                                                                                            285
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
         Reference      Everything from A to Z


Settings                          Software update 188               Steptronic, refer to Automatic
– Changing on the Control Dis‐    SOS, refer to Emergency Re‐        transmission with Step‐
  play 74                          quest, initiating 253             tronic 62
– Language 74                     Sound output 162, 170             Steptronic, refer to Sport pro‐
Settings and information 71       Spare fuse 252                     gram and manual mode M/
Settings, configuring, refer to   Special destinations, naviga‐      S 66
 Personal Profile 30               tion 143                         Stopping, engine 55
Settings, DVD 173                 Special equipment, series         Storage compartment
Setting the clock, 12h/24h for‐    equipment 6                       nets 121
 mat 73                           Speed, average 70                 Storage compart‐
Shifting                          Speed limit 78                     ments 120, 121
– Automatic transmission with
                                  Speed limit, setting 79           Storage, tires 236
  Steptronic 63
                                  Speedometer 14                    Storing the seat position, refer
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
                                  Speed, with winter tires 236       to Seat and mirror mem‐
 sion with Steptronic 66
                                  Split screen 22                    ory 47
Shift lever
– Automatic transmission with     Split screen map settings 153     Storing the vehicle 262
  Steptronic 62                   Spoken instructions, naviga‐      Street, entering for naviga‐
Shift paddles 66                   tion 151                          tion 141
Shift paddles on the steering     Sport program, automatic          Summer tires, refer to Wheels
 wheel 64                          transmission with Step‐           and tires 228
Short commands, voice acti‐        tronic 63, 66                    Summer tires, tread 234
 vation 268                       Spray nozzles, refer to Clean‐    Switches, refer to Cockpit 12
Side airbags 85                    ing the windshield and head‐     Switching off, engine 55
Side windows, refer to Win‐        lamps 60                         Switching off, vehicle 55
 dows 40                          Spray nozzles, refer to Wind‐     Switch-on times, parked-car
Size, refer to Dimensions 266      shield washer nozzles 61          ventilation 109
Ski bag, refer to Ski and snow‐   Stability control systems 94      Symbols 6
 board bag 119                    Start/Stop button 54
Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to   Start/Stop button, starting the   T
 Panoramic glass sunroof 41        engine 55
Slot for remote control 54        Start/Stop button, switching      Tachometer 69
Smokers' package, refer to         off the engine 55                Tailgate
 Ashtray 114                      Starting the engine 55            – Comfort Access 37
                                  Start problems, refer to Jump-    – Emergency operation, refer
Snap-in adapter, mobile
                                   starting 255                       to Opening manually 36
 phone 202
                                  State/province, selecting for     – Opening from the inside 35
Snap-in adapter, refer to Stor‐                                     – Opening from the out‐
 age compartment of center         navigation 140
                                                                      side 36
 armrest 120                      Stations, stored 168
                                                                    – Opening manually 36
Snow chains 237                   Station, storing 162              – Remote control 33
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐         Status information, iDrive 22     Tail lamp, bulb replace‐
 nosis 244                        Status of Owner's Manual 6         ment 250
Socket, refer to Connecting       Steam jets 259                    Tail lamps 249
 electrical devices 114           Steering wheel 49                 Tail lamps
Software applications,            Steering wheel                    – Bulb replacement 249, 250
 iPhone 219                       – Shift paddles 64                Tank gauge, refer to Fuel
                                  Steering wheel, adjusting 49       gauge 69
Software part number 192
                                  Steering wheel lock 54

   286
                          Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                  Everything from A to Z       Reference


Tasks 210                         Tires                              Transmission positions, auto‐
Technical changes, refer to       – Inflation pressure 228            matic transmission with
 Safety 6                         Tires, breaking in 126              Steptronic 64
Technical data 266                Tires, changing 235                Transporting children
Telephone 192                     Tires, condition 234                safely 50
Telephone, adjusting the vol‐     Tires, damage 235                  Treble, tone 160
 ume 196                          Tire size 233                      Trip computer, refer to Dis‐
Telephone, installation loca‐     Tires, minimum tread 234            plays on the Control Dis‐
 tion, refer to Center arm‐       Tires, retreaded tires 236          play 70
 rest 120                         Tires, run-flat tires 236          Trip-distance counter, refer to
TeleService 216                   Tires, storage 236                  Trip odometer 68
Temperature                       Tire tread 234                     Triple turn signal activa‐
– Automatic climate con‐          Toll roads, route 149               tion 59
  trol 106                        Tone 160                           Trip odometer 68
– Changing the unit of meas‐      Tool kit, refer to Onboard ve‐     Trips, planning 147
  ure 72                           hicle tool kit 245                Trunk, refer to Cargo
Temperature, coolant, refer to    Tools, refer to Onboard vehicle     area 115
 Coolant temperature 69            tool kit 245                      Turning circle, refer to Dimen‐
Temperature display               Tow bar 257                         sions 266
– External temperature 68         Tow fitting 258                    Turning lamps, refer to Adap‐
– External temperature warn‐
                                  Towing 256                          tive light control 81
  ing 68
                                  Towing another vehicle 256         Turn signal
– Setting the unit 72
                                  Towing, being towed 256            – Indicator/warning lamp 14
Temperature, engine oil 69
                                  Towing with automatic trans‐       Turn signals 59
Temperature warning 68
                                   mission 256                       Turn signals
Text messages 207
                                  Town/city, navigation 141          – Bulb replacement 249
Theft alarm system, refer to
                                  Tow rope 257                       – Bulb replacement, front 249
 Alarm system 38                                                     Turn signals, triple turn signal
                                  Tow-starting 256, 258
Thigh support adjustment 44                                           activation 59
                                  TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
Third brake lamp, refer to Cen‐
                                   tor 90
 ter brake lamp 250
Tilting the passenger side mir‐
                                  Traction control 95                U
                                  Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
 ror 48                                                              Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
Time                               tion 153
                                  Transmission                        UTQG 233
– Setting the time 72
                                  – Automatic transmission with      Unintentional alarms, avoid‐
– Setting the time zone 73
                                    Steptronic 62                     ing 39
Tire age 233
                                  – Overriding selector lever lock   Units
Tire identification marks 233
                                    in case of automatic trans‐      – Average fuel consump‐
Tire inflation pressure 228
                                    mission with Steptronic 64         tion 72
Tire inflation pressure, check‐   Transmission, automatic            – Temperature 72
 ing 228                           transmission with Step‐           Units of measure, changing on
Tire pressure monitor, refer to    tronic 64                          Control Display 72
 Flat Tire Monitor 88             Transmission lock                  Universal Garage Door
Tire Pressure Monitor             – Refer to Changing selector        Opener 110
 TPM 90                             lever positions 62               Universal remote control 110
Tire Quality Grading 233          – Refer to P Park 63




                                                                                             287
                      Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
          Reference     Everything from A to Z


Unlocking                          Voice activation                   Windows
– From the outside 32              – Navigation 146                   – Safety switch 41
– Setting the unlocking char‐      Voice activation, mobile           Windows, defrosting and de‐
  acteristics 32                    phone 200                         fogging
– Tailgate 37                      Voice activation, short com‐       – Automatic climate con‐
– Without remote control, refer     mands 268                           trol 107
  to Comfort Access 36             Voice activation system 25         Windows, pinch protection 40
Unlocking, from the inside 35      Volume, setting 160                Windshield, cleaning 60
Unlocking, hood 238                                                   Windshield, defrosting, refer
Updates made after the edito‐                                          to Defrosting windows 107
 rial deadline 6
                                   W
                                                                      Windshield wash 59
Update, software 188               Warning and indicator              Windshield washer fluid 61
Upholstery care 260                 lamps 15                          Windshield wash, rear win‐
USB audio interface 182            Warning messages, refer to          dow 61
                                    Check Control 77                  Windshield wash, reservoir for
V                                  Warning signal volumes 161          washer fluid 62
                                   Warning triangle 254               Windshield wash, washer
Vacuum cleaner, connecting,        Washer/wiper system 59              fluid 62
 refer to Connecting electrical    Washer/wiper system, rain          Windshield wash, washer noz‐
 devices 114                        sensor 60                          zles 61
Vehicle                                                               Windshield wiper blades,
                                   Washer/wiper system, washer
– Identification number 192                                            changing 245
                                    fluid 61
Vehicle battery, changing 251                                         Windshield wiper, refer to
                                   Washer/wiper system, wind‐
Vehicle, breaking in 126                                               Washer/wiper system 59
                                    shield washer nozzles 61
Vehicle care 260                                                      Winter storage, care 262
                                   Washer fluid 61
Vehicle care, refer to                                                Winter tires, setting the speed
                                   Washer fluid reservoir 62
 Care 259                                                              limit 79
                                   Washing, vehicle 259
Vehicle equipment 6                                                   Winter tires, suitable tires 236
                                   Waste tray, refer to Ash‐
Vehicle identification number,                                        Winter tires, tread 234
                                    tray 114
 refer to Identification number                                       Wiper blades, changing 245
                                   Water on roads, refer to Driving
 in the engine compart‐                                               Wiper fluid 61
                                    through water 127
 ment 238                                                             Wood, care 261
                                   Weights 267
Vehicle jack 251                                                      Word match concept, naviga‐
                                   Welcome lamps 80
Vehicle paint 260                                                      tion 24
                                   Wheelbase, refer to Dimen‐
Vehicle storage 262                                                   Working in the engine com‐
                                    sions 266
Vehicle, switching off 55                                              partment 238
                                   Wheel change 250
Vehicle wash 259                                                      Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
                                   Wheels and tires 228
Ventilation                                                            Onboard vehicle tool kit 245
– Draft-free 108                   Wheels, changing 235
Ventilation, refer to Parked-car   Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
 ventilation 108                    FTM 88                            X
Version of the navigation          Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
                                    TPM 90                            xDrive 96
 data 138                                                             Xenon headlamps
Video playback 172                 Width, refer to Dimen‐
                                                                      – Bulb replacement 248
Video playback, iPhone 184          sions 266
Video playback, snap-in            Window, convenient opera‐
 adapter 184                        tion 32



    288
                           Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
                                                   Everything from A to Z    Reference


Y
Your individual vehicle
– Settings, refer to Personal
  Profile 30




                                                                                         289
                       Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
More about BMW




                 The Ultimate Driving
bmwusa.com            Machine




                                                                                        01 40 2 914 595 ue




       *BL2914595007*
                                  Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:44
posted:10/31/2012
language:English
pages:291